Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Nortel
323-1059-190
Whats inside...
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz
See Part 1 for commands A to ED-zz See Part 3 for commands RTRV-aa to RTRV-RINGMAP See Part 4 for commands RTRV-ROLL-aa to Z
This information is provided as is, and Nortel Networks does not make or provide any warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement of third party intellectual property rights, and fitness for a particular purpose. Nortel, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Printed in Canada
iii
Contents
About this document Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz
ENT-ALM-PROFILE 3-9 ENT-BLSRRING 3-11 ENT-CHALLENGE-RESPONSE 3-12 ENT-CRS-STS1 3-13 ENT-CRS-STS12C 3-18 ENT-CRS-STS24C 3-21 ENT-CRS-STS3C 3-24 ENT-CRS-STS48C 3-29 ENT-CRS-VT1 3-31 ENT-EC1 3-36 ENT-EQPT 3-38 ENT-ETH 3-43 ENT-FAC 3-48 ENT-FC 3-49 ENT-FFP-OC12 3-51 ENT-FFP-OC192 3-53 ENT-FFP-OC3 3-55 ENT-FFP-OC48 3-57 ENT-GRE 3-59 ENT-IPT 3-61 ENT-IPTR 3-62 ENT-LLSDCC 3-63 ENT-OC12 3-65 ENT-OC192 3-67 ENT-OC3 3-70 ENT-OC48 3-73 ENT-RINGMAP 3-75 ENT-ROLL-STS1 3-77 ENT-ROLL-STS12C 3-81 ENT-ROLL-STS24C 3-84 ENT-ROLL-STS3C 3-87 ENT-ROLL-STS48C 3-91 ENT-ROLL-VT1 3-94 ENT-SECU-ACCESS 3-98 ENT-SECU-BADPID 3-99 ENT-SECU-USER 3-100
ix 3-1
iv Contents ENT-T1 3-103 ENT-T3 3-108 EX-SW-OC12 3-110 EX-SW-OC192 3-112 EX-SW-OC3 3-114 EX-SW-OC48 3-116 INH-EX-OC12 3-118 INH-EX-OC192 3-119 INH-EX-OC3 3-120 INH-EX-OC48 3-121 INH-MSG-ALL 3-122 INH-MSG-BROADCAST 3-123 INH-UPGRD 3-124 INIT-COLD 3-125 INIT-OM-ETH 3-126 INIT-OM-IF 3-127 INIT-REG-ALL 3-129 INIT-REG-EC1 3-133 INIT-REG-ETH 3-137 INIT-REG-FC 3-141 INIT-REG-OC12 3-145 INIT-REG-OC192 3-149 INIT-REG-OC3 3-153 INIT-REG-OC48 3-157 INIT-REG-STS1 3-161 INIT-REG-STS12C 3-165 INIT-REG-STS24C 3-169 INIT-REG-STS3C 3-173 INIT-REG-STS48C 3-176 INIT-REG-T1 3-180 INIT-REG-T3 3-184 INIT-REG-WAN 3-188 INIT-UPGRD-EQPT 3-192 INIT-WARM 3-193 INVK-INSTALL 3-196 INVK-RINGMAP 3-197 INVK-UPGRD 3-198 LOAD-FPGA 3-199 LOAD-INSTALL 3-201 LOAD-REPLACE 3-202 LOAD-RINGMAP 3-203 LOAD-TL1SCRPT-NE 3-204 LOAD-UPGRD 3-207 OPR-ACO-ALL 3-209 OPR-BITSOUTSW 3-210 OPR-EXT-CONT 3-211 OPR-LAMP-TEST 3-214 OPR-LPBK-EC1 3-216 OPR-LPBK-ETH 3-218 OPR-LPBK-FC 3-220 OPR-LPBK-OC12 3-222 Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
Contents v OPR-LPBK-OC192 3-223 OPR-LPBK-OC3 3-224 OPR-LPBK-OC48 3-225 OPR-LPBK-T1 3-226 OPR-LPBK-T3 3-228 OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT 3-230 OPR-PROTNSW-OC12 3-233 OPR-PROTNSW-OC192 3-235 OPR-PROTNSW-OC3 3-237 OPR-PROTNSW-OC48 3-239 OPR-PROTNSW-STS1 3-241 OPR-PROTNSW-STS12C 3-243 OPR-PROTNSW-STS24C 3-245 OPR-PROTNSW-STS3C 3-247 OPR-PROTNSW-STS48C 3-249 OPR-PROTNSW-VT1 3-251 OPR-SYNCSW 3-253 OPR-TARP-TEF 3-254 OPR-TOD-SYNC 3-256 REPT^ALM^COM 3-257 REPT^ALM^EC1 3-260 REPT^ALM^ENV 3-262 REPT^ALM^EQPT 3-265 REPT^ALM^FAC 3-269 REPT^ALM^OC12 3-271 REPT^ALM^OC192 3-274 REPT^ALM^OC3 3-276 REPT^ALM^OC48 3-278 REPT^ALM^SECU 3-280 REPT^ALM^STS1 3-282 REPT^ALM^STS12C 3-286 REPT^ALM^STS24C 3-288 REPT^ALM^STS3C 3-290 REPT^ALM^STS48C 3-293 REPT^ALM^T1 3-295 REPT^ALM^T3 3-297 REPT^ALM^VT1 3-299 REPT^CONFIG^CHG 3-302 REPT^DBCHG 3-303 REPT^EVT^COM 3-306 REPT^EVT^EC1 3-309 REPT^EVT^EQPT 3-311 REPT^EVT^INVENTORY 3-315 REPT^EVT^LOG 3-319 REPT^EVT^OC12 3-321 REPT^EVT^OC192 3-324 REPT^EVT^OC3 3-326 REPT^EVT^OC48 3-329 REPT^EVT^STS1 3-331 REPT^EVT^STS12C 3-335 REPT^EVT^STS24C 3-338 TL1 ReferencePart 2 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
vi Contents REPT^EVT^STS3C 3-341 REPT^EVT^STS48C 3-345 REPT^EVT^T1 3-348 REPT^EVT^T3 3-351 REPT^EVT^VT1 3-353 REPT^EX^LINK 3-356 REPT^IMSG 3-358 REPT^SOC 3-359 REPT-INITZN 3-361 REPT-STAT 3-362 RLS-EXT-CONT 3-363 RLS-LPBK-EC1 3-365 RLS-LPBK-ETH 3-366 RLS-LPBK-FC 3-367 RLS-LPBK-OC12 3-368 RLS-LPBK-OC192 3-369 RLS-LPBK-OC3 3-370 RLS-LPBK-OC48 3-371 RLS-LPBK-T1 3-372 RLS-LPBK-T3 3-373 RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT 3-374 RLS-PROTNSW-OC12 3-376 RLS-PROTNSW-OC192 3-377 RLS-PROTNSW-OC3 3-379 RLS-PROTNSW-OC48 3-380 RLS-PROTNSW-STS1 3-382 RLS-PROTNSW-STS12C 3-383 RLS-PROTNSW-STS24C 3-384 RLS-PROTNSW-STS3C 3-385 RLS-PROTNSW-STS48C 3-386 RLS-PROTNSW-VT1 3-387 RMV-EC1 3-388 RMV-EQPT 3-389 RMV-ETH 3-393 RMV-FC 3-394 RMV-OC12 3-395 RMV-OC192 3-396 RMV-OC3 3-397 RMV-OC48 3-398 RMV-SOC 3-399 RMV-T1 3-400 RMV-T3 3-401 RST-BANNER 3-402 RST-EC1 3-403 RST-EQPT 3-404 RST-ETH 3-407 RST-FC 3-408 RST-OC12 3-409 RST-OC192 3-410 RST-OC3 3-411 RST-OC48 3-412 Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
Contents vii RST-PROV 3-413 RST-PROV-SP 3-417 RST-T1 3-420 RST-T3 3-421
viii Contents
323-1059-190 ix
Supported software
This document supports the software release for Nortel Networks Optical Metro 3500 Release 16.0.
Supported hardware
This document supports the Optical Metro 3500 shelf.
Audience
The following members of your company are the intended audience of this Nortel Networks technical publication (NTP): planners provisioners network administrators transmission standards engineers
Standards
The Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) and the Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA) accepted RS-232 as a standard in 1997 and renumbered this standard as TIA/EIA-232. In this document, RS-232 is used to reflect current labels on the hardware and in the software for the Optical Metro 3500.
TL1 Reference
Maintenance
Supporting documentation for the Optical Metro 3500 Library Change Application Procedures (CAPs) Data Communications Network Planning Guide (NTR710AM)
About the Optical Metro 3500 NTP Library (323-1059-090) Planning and Ordering Guide (NTRN10AU) Network Interworking Guide (NTCA68CA) Installation (323-1059-201) Commissioning (323-1059-210) System Testing (323-1059-222)
System Reconfiguration (323-1059-224) Security and Administration (323-1059-302) Provisioning Synchronization (323-1059-310) Protection Switching (323-1059-311) Bandwidth Management (323-1059-320) Provisioning Equipment and Facilities (323-1059-350)
Performance Monitoring (323-1059-510) Network Surveillance (323-1059-520) Alarm and Trouble Clearing (323-1059-543)
Optical Metro 3000 series DWDM Application Guide (NTRN12AA) Optical Packet Edge System Planning Guide (NTRN10YS) Optical Packet Edge System Network Applications and Management (NTRN11YS) Optical Packet Edge System User Guide (NTN465YS) Site Manager Planning and Installation Guide, Rel 10.0 (NTNM35KA)
restoration of service for equipment that has been carrying International: traffic and is out of service 001-919-992-8300 issues that prevent traffic protection switching issues that prevent completion of software upgrades For non-service-affecting problems: North America: For 24-hour support on issues requiring immediate support 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835) or for 14-hour support (8 a.m. to 10 p.m. EST) on upgrade Note: You require an express routing notification and non-urgent issues. code (ERC). To determine the ERC, see our corporate Web site at www.nortelnetworks.com. Click on the Express Routing Codes link. International: Varies according to country. For a list of telephone numbers, see our corporate Web site at www.nortelnetworks.com. Click on the Contact Us link. Global software upgrade support: North America: 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835) International: Varies according to country. For a list of telephone numbers, see our corporate Web site at www.nortelnetworks.com. Click on the Contact Us link.
3-1
3-
The following table provides an overview of the TL1 commands in this chapter by task. These tasks are listed in alphabetical order.
Task/Command Alarms, events, and external controls commands ENT-ALM-PROFILE INH-MSG-ALL INH-MSG-BROADCAST OPR-ACO-ALL OPR-EXT-CONT RLS-EXT-CONT Automatic report commands REPT^ALM^COM REPT^ALM^EC1 REPT^ALM^ENV REPT^ALM^EQPT REPT^ALM^FAC REPT^ALM^OC12 REPT^ALM^OC192 3-257 3-260 3-262 3-265 3-269 3-271 3-274 3-9 3-122 3-123 3-209 3-211 3-363 Page
3-2 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Task/Command REPT^ALM^OC3 REPT^ALM^OC48 REPT^ALM^SECU REPT^ALM^STS1 REPT^ALM^STS12C REPT^ALM^STS24C REPT^ALM^STS3C REPT^ALM^STS48C REPT^ALM^T1 REPT^ALM^T3 REPT^ALM^VT1 REPT^CONFIG^CHG REPT^DBCHG REPT^EVT^COM REPT^EVT^EC1 REPT^EVT^EQPT REPT^EVT^INVENTORY REPT^EVT^LOG REPT^EVT^OC12 REPT^EVT^OC192 REPT^EVT^OC3 REPT^EVT^OC48 REPT^EVT^STS1 REPT^EVT^STS12C REPT^EVT^STS24C REPT^EVT^STS3C REPT^EVT^STS48C REPT^EVT^T1 REPT^EVT^T3 Page 3-276 3-278 3-280 3-282 3-286 3-288 3-290 3-293 3-295 3-297 3-299 3-302 3-303 3-306 3-309 3-311 3-315 3-319 3-321 3-324 3-326 3-329 3-331 3-335 3-338 3-341 3-345 3-348 3-351
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-3 Task/Command REPT^EVT^VT1 REPT^EX^LINK REPT^IMSG REPT^SOC BLSR commands ENT-BLSRRING ENT-RINGMAP INVK-RINGMAP LOAD-RINGMAP Cross-connect commands ENT-CRS-STS1 ENT-CRS-STS12C ENT-CRS-STS24C ENT-CRS-STS3C ENT-CRS-STS48C ENT-CRS-VT1 DS1 service module commands OPR-LAMP-TEST Equipment commands ENT-EQPT INIT-UPGRD-EQPT RMV-EQPT RST-EQPT Facility commands ENT-EC1 ENT-ETH ENT-FC ENT-FFP-OC12 ENT-FFP-OC192 3-36 3-43 3-49 3-51 3-53 3-38 3-192 3-389 3-404 3-214 3-13 3-18 3-21 3-24 3-29 3-31 3-11 3-75 3-197 3-203 Page 3-353 3-356 3-358 3-359
3-4 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Task/Command ENT-FFP-OC3 ENT-FFP-OC48 ENT-OC12 ENT-OC192 ENT-OC3 ENT-OC48 ENT-T1 ENT-T3 RMV-EC1 RMV-ETH RMV-FC RMV-OC12 RMV-OC192 RMV-OC3 RMV-OC48 RMV-T1 RMV-T3 RST-EC1 RST-ETH RST-FC RST-OC12 RST-OC192 RST-OC3 RST-OC48 RST-T1 RST-T3 Facility test signal generation commands OPR-LPBK-EC1 OPR-LPBK-ETH 3-216 3-218 Page 3-55 3-57 3-65 3-67 3-70 3-73 3-103 3-108 3-388 3-393 3-394 3-395 3-396 3-397 3-398 3-400 3-401 3-403 3-407 3-408 3-409 3-410 3-411 3-412 3-420 3-421
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-5 Task/Command OPR-LPBK-FC OPR-LPBK-OC12 OPR-LPBK-OC192 OPR-LPBK-OC3 OPR-LPBK-OC48 OPR-LPBK-T1 OPR-LPBK-T3 RLS-LPBK-EC1 RLS-LPBK-ETH RLS-LPBK-FC RLS-LPBK-OC12 RLS-LPBK-OC192 RLS-LPBK-OC3 RLS-LPBK-OC48 RLS-LPBK-T1 RLS-LPBK-T3 Initialization commands INIT-COLD INIT-WARM Inservice traffic rollover commands ENT-ROLL-STS1 ENT-ROLL-STS12C ENT-ROLL-STS24C ENT-ROLL-STS3C ENT-ROLL-STS48C ENT-ROLL-VT1 Network processor commands ENT-FAC ENT-GRE 3-48 3-59 3-77 3-81 3-84 3-87 3-91 3-94 3-125 3-193 Page 3-220 3-222 3-223 3-224 3-225 3-226 3-228 3-365 3-366 3-367 3-368 3-369 3-370 3-371 3-372 3-373
3-6 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Task/Command RMV-SOC Packet Edge ring management commands ENT-IPT ENT-IPTR Performance monitoring commands INIT-OM-ETH INIT-OM-IF INIT-REG-ALL INIT-REG-EC1 INIT-REG-ETH INIT-REG-FC INIT-REG-OC12 INIT-REG-OC192 INIT-REG-OC3 INIT-REG-OC48 INIT-REG-STS1 INIT-REG-STS12C INIT-REG-STS24C INIT-REG-STS3C INIT-REG-STS48C INIT-REG-T1 INIT-REG-T3 INIT-REG-WAN Protection switching commands EX-SW-OC12 EX-SW-OC192 EX-SW-OC3 EX-SW-OC48 INH-EX-OC12 3-110 3-112 3-114 3-116 3-119 3-126 3-127 3-129 3-133 3-137 3-141 3-145 3-149 3-153 3-157 3-161 3-165 3-169 3-173 3-176 3-180 3-184 3-188 3-61 3-62 Page 3-399
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-7 Task/Command INH-EX-OC192 INH-EX-OC3 INH-EX-OC48 OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT OPR-PROTNSW-OC12 OPR-PROTNSW-OC192 OPR-PROTNSW-OC3 OPR-PROTNSW-OC48 OPR-PROTNSW-STS1 OPR-PROTNSW-STS12C OPR-PROTNSW-STS24C OPR-PROTNSW-STS3C OPR-PROTNSW-STS48C OPR-PROTNSW-VT1 RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT RLS-PROTNSW-OC12 RLS-PROTNSW-OC192 RLS-PROTNSW-OC3 RLS-PROTNSW-OC48 RLS-PROTNSW-STS1 RLS-PROTNSW-STS12C RLS-PROTNSW-STS24C RLS-PROTNSW-STS3C RLS-PROTNSW-STS48C RLS-PROTNSW-VT1 SDCC commands ENT-LLSDCC Security and administration commands ENT-CHALLENGE-RESPONSE 3-12 3-63 Page 3-116 3-120 3-121 3-230 3-233 3-235 3-237 3-239 3-243 3-245 3-245 3-247 3-249 3-251 3-374 3-376 3-377 3-379 3-380 3-382 3-383 3-384 3-385 3-386 3-387
3-8 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Task/Command ENT-SECU-ACCESS ENT-SECU-BADPID ENT-SECU-USER LOAD-TL1SCRPT-NE OPR-TOD-SYNC RST-BANNER RST-PROV RST-PROV-SP Software load installation commands INVK-INSTALL LOAD-INSTALL LOAD-UPGRD Software upgrade commands INH-UPGRD INVK-UPGRD LOAD-FPGA LOAD-REPLACE Synchronization commands OPR-BITSOUTSW OPR-SYNCSW TARP commands OPR-TARP-TEF Test access commands REPT-INITZN REPT-STAT 3-361 3-362 3-254 3-210 3-253 3-124 3-198 3-199 3-202 3-196 3-201 3-207 Page 3-98 3-99 3-100 3-204 3-256 3-402 3-413 3-417
ENT-ALM-PROFILE
The Enter Alarm Profile command allows the user to create a new alarm profile. The profile is given a name and the status of all alarms in the profile is initially set to enabled by default. Security Level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-ALM-PROFILE:[TID]::CTAG::AIDTYPE,PRFLNAME; Table 3-1 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG AIDTYPE PRFLNAME Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Access identifier TYPE Alarm profile name assigned by user
Table 3-2 Parameter description Parameter AIDTYPE Possible values VT1 STS1 STS3C STS12C STS24C STS48C EQPT T1 T3 EC1 E1 OC3 Description VT1 facility STS-1 facility STS-3C facility STS-12C facility STS-24C facility STS-48C facility equipment T1 facility T3 facility EC-1 facility E1 facility OC-3 facility
3-10 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-2 (continued) Parameter description Parameter AIDTYPE Possible values OC12 OC48 OC192 FAC COM DSM SECU ETH WAN FC PRFLNAME ASCII string Description OC-12 facility OC-48 facility OC-192 facility conditions attributed to ILAN facilities conditions attributed to shelf or SP DS service module facility Security related Ethernet facility WAN facility Fibre Channel facility Alarm profile name-can be up to 20 characters long and must be enclosed within quotation marks (quotation marks and backslash to be excluded from name)
Example input
ENT-BLSRRING
Use the Enter BLSR Ring command to create a new BLSR ring with the specified name. This command is supported on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-BLSRRING:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-3 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier. Ring name Correlation tag
Table 3-4 AID descriptions AID type Ring name Command-specific values Purpose
An alphanumeric string between 1 Identify the ring name and 20 characters. Special characters are not supported.
Table 3-5 Parameter descriptions Parameter AID Possible values An alphanumeric string between 1 and 20 characters. Special characters are not supported. Description Ring name
Example input
ENT-CHALLENGE-RESPONSE
Use the Enter Challenge Response command to enter the response to a retrieved challenge. If the response is correct, you are logged in to the network processor or shelf processor with the appropriate user privilege code (UPC) for this login session. Security level Level 1 Input syntax
ENT-CHALLENGE-RESPONSE:[TID]::CTAG::RESPONSE; Table 3-6 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG RESPONSE Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Response
Table 3-7 Parameter descriptions Parameter RESPONSE Possible values Any valid response Description Response to the retrieved challenge. If the response includes lowercase characters, enclose the response in double quotes ().
Example input
ENT-CRS-STS1
The Enter Cross-connect STS-1 command is used to add an STS-1 connection between two STS-1 facilities. Note: When a cross-connect command fails due to bandwidth fragmentation on the 8x100BT-P2P or MS DSM, the following message is issued: Available backplane bandwidth is fragmented. Use DEFRAG-EQPT to perform bandwidth defragmentation. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-CRS-STS1:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain][,FROMAEND=Domain][,FROMZEND=Domain] [,TOAEND=Domain][,TOZEND=Domain]; Table 3-8 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Path protection Switch Mate. Path protection for the FromAID OC-3, OC-3x4, OC-12, OC-12x4 STS, OC-48, OC-48 STS, or OC-192 interface only when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR. Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa). APS ID of FromAID originating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems.
ToAID
CKTID
3-14 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-9 AID descriptions AID type STS-1 Facility AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4, sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12, port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS, sts# = 1 to 12 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12, sts# = 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 facility on an EC-1 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 Identify the STS-1 facility on a DS3 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9, port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
EC1-slot#-port#
DS3-slot#-port#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-15 Table 3-9 (continued) AID descriptions AID type STS-1 Facility AID Command-specific values WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Note: For shelves equipped with VTX-48 or VTX-48e circuit packs, the total bandwidth available for a Point-to-Point circuit pack is 12xSTS1 in each direction, that is, 12xSTS1 for ingress and 12xSTS1 for egress. However, the bandwidth is allocated bidirectionally, which means the same AID must be used for ingress and egress. STS1 Facility AID on MS DSM DS3-slot-port-%HLINK- slot = 3 or 5, port = 1 to 6, Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hline-Hslot-Hport Hslot = 3 to 10, Hport = 1 to 4 WAN-slot-port-sts%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport STSMDS1-grp%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport RPR AID IPTR-index# slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8; sts = 1 to 3, Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hslot = 3 to 10, Hport = 1 to 4 grp = 1 to 3 (grp 1 =DS1s 1 to 28, grp 2 = DS1s 29 to 56, grp 3 = DS1s 57 to 84), Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hslot = 3 to 10, Hport = 1 to 4 Identify the RPR where index# = 1 to 8
IPTR-index#-port#-sts# Identify the RPR, for RPRs that have virtual concatenation enabled, where index# = 1 to 8 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 to 24 Note: For RPR connections where the Side 1 and Side 2 optics are both in odd slots, the slot number of the optical interface used for Side 1 must be greater than the slot number of the optical interface used for Side 2 (for example, you can use OC48-11 for Side 1 and OC12-5 for Side 2).
3-16 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-10 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR IPTRING SWMATE OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection SONET bandwith allocation for an RPR Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 sts# = 1 to 12 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. APS ID of FromAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems
OC192-slot#-sts#
CKTID
1 to 40 alphanumeric characters
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-17 Table 3-10 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter TOAEND TOZEND Possible values An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15 Description APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems
Note: If the fromAid is a tributary, FROMAEND/FROMZEND parameters are not applicable. If toAid is a tributary, TOAEND/TOZEND parameters are not applicable.
AID, CCT, and SWMATE usage Figure 4-1 on page 4-122 shows valid combinations of AID, CCT, and SWMATE along with the resulting facility connections.
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, add a bidirectional STS-1 passthrough cross-connection between the OC-3 interfaces in slot 9 port 1 sts 1 and slot 10 port 1 sts 1:
ENT-CRS-STS1:NEWYORK:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-10-1-1:CTAG12::2WAY;
Note: The OCn optical circuit pack for either end must be on different slots of a different protection pair.
Example input
For the OTTAWA network element, add a STS-1 cross-connection between the OC-48 interface in slot 11 sts 1 and the OC-12 interface in slot 9 sts 1 and define the entry point and the exit point for a BLSR system:
ENT-CRS-STS1:OTTAWA:OC48-11-1,OC12-9-1-1:CTAG12::2WAY: FROMAEND=2,FROMZEND=3;
ENT-CRS-STS12C
The Enter Cross-connect STS-12c command is used to add a STS-12c connection between two STS12c facilities. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-CRS-STS12C:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain][,FROMAEND=Domain][,FROMZEND=Domain] [,TOAEND=Domain][,TOZEND=Domain]; Table 3-11 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Identifies the path protection for the FromAID when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR or 2WAYPR. Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa). APS ID of FromAID originating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems.
ToAID
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-19 Table 3-12 AID descriptions AID type STS-12c Facility AID Command-specific values Purpose OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 Identify the STS-12c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1 Identify the RPR where index# = 1 to 8
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
RPR AID
IPTR-index#
Note: For RPR connections where the Side 1 and Side 2 optics are both in odd slots, the slot number of the optical interface used for Side 1 must be greater than the slot number of the optical interface used for Side 2 (for example, you can use OC48-11 for Side 1 and OC12-5 for Side 2). Table 3-13 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR IPTRING Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection SONET bandwith allocation for an RPR
3-20 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-13 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter SWMATE Possible values Description
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-12c facility where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility where slot# = 11, 12, sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. APS ID of FromAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems
FROMAEND An integer between 0 and 15 FROMZEND An integer between 0 and 15 TOAEND TOZEND An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15
Note: If the fromAid is a tributary, FROMAEND/FROMZEND parameters are not applicable. If toAid is a tributary, TOAEND/TOZEND parameters are not applicable.
AID, CCT, and SWMATE usage Figure 4-2 on page 4-123 shows valid combinations of AID, CCT, and SWMATE along with the resulting facility connections.
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, add a bidirectional STS-12c passthrough cross-connection between the OC-12 interfaces in slots 9 and 10:
ENT-CRS-STS12C:NEWYORK:OC12-9-1-1,OC12-10-1-1:CTAG12::2WAY;
Note: The OCn optical circuit pack for either end must be on different slots of a different protection pair.
Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
ENT-CRS-STS24C
The Enter Cross-connect STS-24c command is used to add a STS-24c connection between two STS24c facilities. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-CRS-STS24C:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain][,FROMAEND=Domain][,FROMZEND=Domain] [,TOAEND=Domain][,TOZEND=Domain]; Table 3-14 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. For a unidirectional connection, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The facility at the other end of the cross-connect. For a unidirectional connection, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Identifies the path protection for the FromAID when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR or 2WAYPR. Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa).
ToAID
FROMAEND APS ID of FromAID originating node for BLSR systems. FROMZEND APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems. TOAEND TOZEND APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems.
3-22 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-15 AID descriptions AID type STS-24c Facility AID Command-specific values Purpose OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ... 169 Identify the STS-24c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
Table 3-16 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR SWMATE OC48-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-sts# CKTID 1 to 40 alphanumeric characters An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15 Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 3 to 12, sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 11, 12, sts# = 1, 25, ... 169 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. APS ID of FromAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems
FROMAEND FROMZEND
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-23 Table 3-16 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter TOAEND TOZEND Possible values An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15 Description APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems
Note: If the fromAid is a tributary, FROMAEND/FROMZEND parameters are not applicable. If toAid is a tributary, TOAEND/TOZEND parameters are not applicable.
AID, CCT, and SWMATE usage Figure 4-2 on page 4-123 shows valid combinations of AID, CCT, and SWMATE along with the resulting facility connections.
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, add a bidirectional STS-24c passthrough cross-connection between the OC-48 STS interfaces in slots 9 and 10:
ENT-CRS-STS24C:NEWYORK:OC48-9-1-1,OC48-10-1-1:CTAG12::2WAY;
Note: The OCn optical circuit pack for either end must be on different slots of a different protection pair.
ENT-CRS-STS3C
The Enter Cross-connect STS-3c command is used to add an STS-3c connection between two STS3c facilities. Note 1: When a cross-connect command fails due to bandwidth fragmentation on the 8x100BT-P2P or MS DSM, the following message is issued: Available backplane bandwidth is fragmented. Use DEFRAG-EQPT to perform bandwidth defragmentation. Note 2: When a cross-connect command fails due to STS-3c WAN physical fragmentation on the MS DSM, the following message is issued: Resource required to create STS3c connection are fragmented. Use DEFRAG-EQPT to perform physical defragmentation. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-CRS-STS3C:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain][,FROMAEND=Domain][,FROMZEND=Domain] [,TOAEND=Domain][,TOZEND=Domain]; Table 3-17 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID ToAID CTAG CCT SWMATE Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. For unidirectional connections, FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The facility at the other end of the cross-connect. For unidirectional connections, ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Path protection switch mate. Path protection for the FromAID OC-n interface when CCT is protected (that is, when CCT is 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR). Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa).
CKTID
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-25 Table 3-17 (continued) Syntax definition Field Purpose
FROMZEND APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems. TOAEND TOZEND APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems.
Table 3-18 AID descriptions AID type STS-3c Facility AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4, sts# =1 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12, port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 46 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12, sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 190 Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, or 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1, 4, 7, ... 19 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
3-26 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-18 (continued) AID descriptions AID type STS-3c Facility AID Command-specific values WAN-slot-port-sts%HLINK-Hline-HslotHport Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port of the MS DSM where slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 sts = 1; Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10, Hport = 1 to 4 Identify the RPR where index# = 1 to 8
RPR AID
IPTR-index#
IPTR-index#-port#-sts# Identify the RPR, for RPRs that have virtual concatenation enabled, where index# = 1 to 8, port# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1 to 8 Note: For RPR connections where the Side 1 and Side 2 optics are both in odd slots, the slot number of the optical interface used for Side 1 must be greater than the slot number of the optical interface used for Side 2 (for example, you can use OC48-11 for Side 1 and OC12-5 for Side 2). Table 3-19 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR IPTRING Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection SONET bandwith allocation for an RPR
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-27 Table 3-19 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter SWMATE Possible values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Description Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 46 Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 190 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect.
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
CKTID
1 to 40 alphanumeric characters
An integer between 0 and APS ID of FromAID originating node for 15 BLSR systems An integer between 0 and APS ID of FromAID terminating node for 15 BLSR systems An integer between 0 and APS ID of ToAID originating node for 15 BLSR systems An integer between 0 and APS ID of ToAID terminating node for 15 BLSR systems
Note: If the fromAid is a tributary, FROMAEND/FROMZEND parameters are not applicable. If toAid is a tributary, TOAEND/TOZEND parameters are not applicable.
AID, CCT, and SWMATE usage Figure 4-2 on page 4-123 shows valid combinations of AID, CCT, and SWMATE along with the resulting facility connections.
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, add a bidirectional STS-3c passthrough cross-connection between the OC-3 interfaces in slots 9 and 10:
ENT-CRS-STS3C:NEWYORK:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-10-1-1:CTAG12::2WAY;
Note: The OCn optical circuit pack for either end must be on different slots of a different protection pair.
Example input
For the OTTAWA network element, add a STS-3c cross-connection between the OC-48 interface in slot 11 sts 4 and the OC-12 interface in slot 9 sts 1 and define a BLSR passthrough:
ENT-CRS-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC48-11-4,OC12-9-1-1:CTAG5::2WAY: FROMAEND=1,FROMZEND=4;
ENT-CRS-STS48C
The Enter Cross-connect STS-48c command is used to add a STS-48c connection between two STS48c facilities. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-CRS-STS48C:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain][,FROMAEND=Domain][,FROMZEND=Domain] [,TOAEND=Domain][,TOZEND=Domain]; Table 3-20 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The facility at the other end of the cross-connect. If the connection is unidirectional, the ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Identifies the path protection for the FromAID when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR or 2WAYPR. Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa).
ToAID
FROMAEND APS ID of FromAID originating node for BLSR systems. FROMZEND APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems. TOAEND TOZEND APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems.
Table 3-21 AID descriptions AID type STS-48c Facility AID Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-sts# Purpose slot# = 3 to 12, sts# = 1 slot# = 11, 12, sts# = 1, 49, ... 145
3-30 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-22 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR SWMATE OC48-slot#-sts# Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1 Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, ... 145 Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. APS ID of FromAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems
OC192-slot#-sts#
CKTID
1 to 40 alphanumeric characters An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15
Note: If the fromAid is a tributary, FROMAEND/FROMZEND parameters are not applicable. If toAid is a tributary, TOAEND/TOZEND parameters are not applicable.
AID, CCT, and SWMATE usage Figure 4-2 on page 4-123 shows valid combinations of AID, CCT, and SWMATE along with the resulting facility connections.
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, add a bidirectional STS-48c passthrough cross-connection between the OC-48 STS interfaces in slots 9 and 10:
ENT-CRS-STS48C:NEWYORK:OC48-9-1-1,OC48-10-1-1:CTAG12::2WAY;
Note: The OCn optical circuit pack for either end must be on different slots of a different protection pair.
Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
ENT-CRS-VT1
The Enter Cross-connect VT1.5 command is used to cross-connect one VT1.5 facility to another. Note 1: When a cross-connect command fails due to bandwidth fragmentation on the 8x100BT-P2P or MS DSM, the following message is issued: Available backplane bandwidth is fragmented. The message may not appear when provisioning a bulk of VT1.5 cross-connects. The message always appears for single VT1.5 cross-connects. Use DEFRAG-EQPT to perform bandwidth defragmentation. Note 2: When a cross-connect command fails due to DS1 physical fragmentation on the MS DSM, the following message is issued: Resource required to create a DS1 group <grp> connection are fragmented, where <grp> is the number of the DS1 group or groups. Use DEFRAG-EQPT to perform physical defragmentation. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-CRS-VT1:[TID]:FromAID,ToAID:CTAG::[CCT]:[SWMATE=Domain] [,CKTID=Domain][,FROMAEND=Domain][,FROMZEND=Domain] [,TOAEND=Domain][,TOZEND=Domain]; Table 3-23 Syntax definition Field TID FromAID ToAID CTAG CCT SWMATE Purpose Target identifier From access identifier. The facility at one end of the cross-connect. For unidirectional connections, FromAID specifies the signal source. To access identifier. The facility at the other end of the cross-connect. For unidirectional connections, ToAID specifies the signal destination. Correlation tag Cross-connection type Path protection Switch Mate. Path protection for the FromAID OC-3, OC-3x4, OC-12 or OC-48 interface only when the CCT is protected. That is, when the CCT is one of 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR. Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect. Enclose the string in double quotes (for example, Toronto-Ottawa).
CKTID
3-32 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-23 (continued) Syntax definition Field Purpose
FROMZEND APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems. TOAEND TOZEND APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems. APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems.
Table 3-24 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 4 to 10 port# = 1 to 12 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DS1 service module port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 DS1 service module grp# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 MS DSM port# = 1 to 84, Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4 MS DSM grp# = 1 to 3, Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
DS1-DFLT-grp#-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport#
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-HlineHslot#-Hport#
DS1-DFLT-grp#-%HLINK-HlineHslot#-Hport#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-33 Table 3-24 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1, sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 for sts# = 1 or 2 vtg# = 1 or 2 for sts# = 3 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 6, port# = 1 to 8, sts# = 1 to 2, vtg# = 1 to 7, vt# = 1 to 4 or sts#=3, vtg#=1 to 2, Hline = OC3 or OC12, Hslot# = 3 to 10, Hport# = 1 to 4 grp# = 1 to 3
VT1.5 facility OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# AID OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-ALL EC1-slot#-port#-ALL
Use the DFLT-# smart AID to cross-connect one of three sets of 28 DS1s to VT1.5s within an STS-1. For each possible DFLT-# value, a specific set of 28 ports is cross-connected to an STS-1. For example, the DFLT-2 set of DS1 ports can be mapped to STS1-3. This causes DS1 ports 29 through 56 to be cross-connected to STS1-3. Table 3-25 shows the DFLT-# smart AID value and the corresponding ports. For network element NEWYORK, create 28 DS1, 2 way bidirectional connections from DSM STS1, group number 1, connecting to OC12 in slot 5, port 1 channel 1 through OC3 in slot 3 channel 1.
Example input ENT-CRS-VT1:NEWYORK:DS1-DFLT-1-%HLINK-OC3-3-1,OC12-5-1-1-ALL:1 89::2WAY:,CKTID="";
3-34 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-25 DFLT-# smart AID values DFLT-# 1 2 3 Ports 1 to 28 29 to 56 57 to 84 Equivalent facilities DS1-4-1 DS1-6-4 DS1-6-5 DS1-8-8 DS1-8-9 DS1-10-12
Table 3-26 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR SWMATE OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-ALL OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection (default) Unidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional path ring connection Bidirectional bridge ring connection Identify the VT1.5 facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 facility where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
CKTID
1 to 40 alphanumeric characters Connection identifier. A string between 1 and 40 alphanumeric characters that identifies the cross-connect.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-35 Table 3-26 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values Description APS ID of FromAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of FromAID terminating node for BLSR systems APS ID of ToAID originating node for BLSR systems APS ID of ToAID terminating node for BLSR systems
FROMAEND An integer between 0 and 15 FROMZEND TOAEND TOZEND An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15
Note: If the fromAid is a tributary, FROMAEND/FROMZEND parameters are not applicable. If toAid is a tributary, TOAEND/TOZEND parameters are not applicable.
AID, CCT, and SWMATE usage Figure 4-3 on page 4-124 shows valid combinations of AID, CCT, and SWMATE along with the resulting facility connections.
Example input
For the NEWYORK network element, add a VT1.5 bidirectional cross-connect between the DS1 mapper in slot four and the path protected optical interfaces in slots 9 and 10:
ENT-CRS-VT1:NEWYORK:OC3-9-2-1-1-1,DS1-4-1:CTAG45:: 2WAYPR:SWMATE=OC3-10-2-1-1-1;
For the WASHINGTON network element, add 28 bidirectional VT1.5 cross-connects between the DFLT-1 VT1.5 facilities (DS1 ports to 12 on the slot 4 DS1 mapper, DS1 ports 1 to 12 on the slot 5 DS1 mapper and DS1 ports 1 to 4 on the slot 6 DS1 mapper), from the path protected optical interfaces in slots 8 and 10:
ENT-CRS-VT1:WASHINGTON:OC3-8-3-1-ALL,DS1-DFLT-1:CTAG89:: 2WAYPR:SWMATE=OC3-10-3-1-ALL;
Note: For a BLSR VT1.5 traffic, the cross-connects on the passthrough nodes should be at the STS-1 level.
ENT-EC1
The Enter EC-1 command provisions and enters the attributes of an EC-1 facility in a network element. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-EC1:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[LBO=Domain]:[PST],[SST]; Table 3-27 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LBO PST SST Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. EC-1 facility to act on. Correlation tag Line buildout Primary state Secondary state
Table 3-28 AID descriptions AID type EC1 AID Command-specific values EC1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the EC-1 facility where slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-37 Table 3-29 Parameter descriptions Parameter LBO Possible values 1 2 PST IS OOS-MA SST (see Note) AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA Description 0 to 224 ft to EC-1 cross-connect (default) 225 to 450 ft to EC-1 cross-connect In service (default) Out of service maintenance for provisioning memory administration Auto in-service Auto in-service deactivated Test Test Deactivated
Note: AINS is not supported on EC-1 facilities and equipment. Example input
Set the EC-1 facilities on all ports in slot 9 to a line buildout of 0 to 224 feet, a primary state of in-service, and a secondary state of auto in-service:
ENT-EC1:SEATTLE:EC1-9-ALL:CTAG12:::LBO=1:IS,AINS;
ENT-EQPT
The Enter Equipment command is used to enter the attributes of a given type of common equipment module or slot definition in a network element. This tells the network element that a specific circuit pack of a particular type is supposed to be in a particular slot. If the system does a self test and finds a circuit pack in a slot that does not match the description provisioned, an alarm is raised. On a shelf, if this command is used to add OC-3x4, OC-12, or OC-12x4 STS equipment, it also adds the corresponding section data communications channel (SDCC) link (layers 1, 2). The SDCC protection scheme is based on the OC-3x4, OC-12, or OC-12x4 STS equipment protection scheme (Simplex instead of 1+1 protected). Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-EQPT:[TID]:AID:CTAG::::[PST]; Table 3-30 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG PST Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Equipment to act on. Correlation tag Primary state
Table 3-31 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID DS3 AID Command-specific Purpose values DS1-slot# DS3-slot# Identify the DS1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3/EC1x12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-39 Table 3-31 (continued) AID descriptions AID type OC-3 AID Command-specific Purpose values OC3-slot# Identify the OC-3 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-48 equipment where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS Identify the OC-48 DWDM SFP module where slot# = 3 to 12, port# = 1 Identify the OC-192 equipment where slot# = 11, 12 Identify the EC-1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the ILAN equipment Identify the protection switch controller Identify the protection switch extender Note: The PSX can only be deleted if DS1-6-5 and higher do not exist. NP AID NP Identify the network processor Identify the 4x100BT equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE 2.5G SFP module where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1, 2 Identify the 2xGigE equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for double slot cards and slot#=3 to 10 for single slot 2xGigE. Identify the 4x100FX equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10
OC-48 DWDM SFP AID OC-192 AID EC1 AID ILAN AID PSC AID PSX AID
POC48-slot#-port#
3-40 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-31 (continued) AID descriptions AID type 1GFOS AID 100FOSO AID 100FOST AID 1GE25G AID GEFC AID Command-specific Purpose values 1GFOS-slot# Identify the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 4x100FX-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 8x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE 2.5G equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Identify the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P SFP module, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1, 2 Identify the DSM DS1 termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
DS1TM AID
DS1TM-slot#%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-41 Table 3-31 (continued) AID descriptions AID type MS DSM AID Command-specific Purpose values AGGOC3-slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# AGGOC3OC12slot#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#hport# PECN-slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# PFOST-slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# POC3-slot#-port#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# POC3OC12-slot#port#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#hport# Table 3-32 Parameter descriptions Parameter PST Possible values IS OOS-MA Description In-service (default) Out-Of-Service maintenance for provisioning Memory Administration Identify the MS DSM Aggregate equipment where HLINE= OC3 slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM Aggregate equipment where HLINE= OC3 or OC12 slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM DS3 Expansion equipment where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 3 to 6, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM 10/100BaseT Expansion equipment where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 3 to 6, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM OC-3 SFP where HLINE=OC3 slot# = 1 or 2, port#=1, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM OC-3/12 SFP where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 1 or 2, port# = 1, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
ENT-ETH
Use the Enter Ethernet command to provision an Ethernet facility. Note 1: The WAN facility of a circuit pack is created automatically when its corresponding ETH facility is created. Note 2: When auto-negotiation is disabled on the Optical Metro 3500, the customer data equipment must also have auto-negotiation disabled. Security level Level 3 Input syntax for the 2x100BT-P2P
ED-ETH:[tid]:aid:ctag:::[,ETHDPX=Domain] [,SPEED=Domain][,PASSCTRL=Domain]:[PST-Q];
3-44 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-33 (continued) Syntax definition Field TXCON PAUSETXOVERRIDE PST-Q Table 3-34 AID descriptions AID type ETH AID Command-specific values Purpose ETH-slot#-port# ETH-slot#-ALL Identify the Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 or 2 for all other circuit packs Identify the MS DSM Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 6 port# = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to10 Hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Transmit conditioning Pause frame transmission override Primary state qualifier
ETH-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot#-Hport#
Table 3-35 Parameter descriptions Parameter AN Possible values ENABLE (default) DISABLE Description Enable or disable auto-negotiation. When auto-negotiation is disabled, the customer data equipment must also have auto-negotiation disabled. Set the duplex mode to Half, Full, or Both. Make sure the device connected to the ETH port has the same duplex setting.
ETHDPX
SPEED
Set the speed of the port to 10, 100, or 10/100 Mbit/s. For the 2x100BT-P2P card, since auto-negotiation is not supported, the 10/100 setting is equivalent to 100. Make sure the device connected to the port has the same speed.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-45 Table 3-35 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter PASSCTRL Possible values ENABLE DISABLE (default) Description Discard pause frames received on the port (disable) or allow pause frames to transparently pass through (enable). Note that this attribute applies to pass control frames of type 0x8808 only (PAUSE is the only defined control frame). Other pass control frames (for example, type 0x8809) are not affected by this attribute, and will always be transparently passed through. Note: If pause frame transmission (PAUSETX) is enabled, the PASSCTRL attribute should be disabled to avoid flow control problems between the ETH port and subtending equipment. FLOWCTRL ASYM (default) SYM NONE PAUSETX ENABLE (default) DISABLE Set the flow control capability used by auto negotiation to ASYM, SYM or NONE. Auto negotiation sets the actual flow control between two devices. Note that if auto negotiation is disabled, this attribute is ignored. Enable or disable transmission of pause frames. If auto negotiation is enabled, this parameter only applies if PAUSETXOVERRIDE is also enabled. Set the maximum frame size (in bytes) that this port can transmit. This size includes all the overhead bytes such as MAC addresses, length and CRCs. 1594 is not supported by GE/FC SFP.
MTU
3-46 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-35 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter TXCON Possible values ENABLE (default) DISABLE Description Enable or disable shut down of the transmit signal of the Ethernet port upon detection of certain Ethernet or WAN port defects. You can only edit this parameter if the ETH facility is out-of-service (OOS-MA). If enabled, the transmit signal of the port shuts down when any of the following occur: there are client signal failures received from the far-end; there is a link down condition on the corresponding WAN port; the corresponding WAN port receives client signal failures; or there are no cross-connects on the corresponding WAN port. In addition: client signal failures received from the far-end cause ingress frames at the ETH port to be discarded and egress frames on the WAN ports to be discarded link down conditions on the ETH port trigger transmission of client signal failures to the WAN port client signal failures from the WAN port trigger a Far End Client Rx Signal Failure alarm If disabled, the transmit signal of the port does not shut down if any of the conditions listed above occur. In addition, an ETH link down condition does not trigger transmission of client signal failures to the WAN port and client signal failures from the WAN port do not trigger a Far End Client Rx Signal Failure alarm. Note 1: If TXCON is disabled, the GFP CSF client management frame transmission will also be disabled with local client failures. If this occurs, incoming WAN traffic will cause LAN OMs to increment. However, frames will be silently discarded whether auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled. Note 2: If TXCON is disabled, the Gigabit Ethernet laser will remain off even when no cross-connects are assigned against the WAN port.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-47 Table 3-35 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter PAUSETX OVRRIDE Possible values ENABLE DISABLE (default) Description If auto-negotiation is enabled and PAUSETXOVRRIDE = ENABLE: Pause frames are generated by the port and sent in the egress direction when PAUSETX = Enable, and not generated when PAUSETX = Disable, regardless of the outcome of the auto-negotiation process. If auto-negotiation is enabled and PAUSETXOVRRIDE = DISABLE: The port abides with the negotiated pause transmission setting. When auto-negotiation is disabled, the PAUSETXOVRRIDE setting is ignored. PST-Q IS (default) OOS-MA Example input Set the state of the facility to in-service (IS) or out-of-service management (OOS-MA).
Provision ETH port 1 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA as follows: Set the duplex mode to FULL Set the speed to 100 Mbit/s Discard pause frames Set the primary state in-service
ENT-ETH:OTTAWA:ETH-7-1:CTAG01:::ETHDPX=FULL,SPEED=100, PASSCTRL=DISABLE:IS;
ENT-FAC
The Enter Facility command is used to provision an NP facility. NP facilities include ILANSP, ILANNP, ILAN1, ILAN2, COLAN, and X25. ILANSP and ILANNP cannot be manually provisioned. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-FAC:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-36 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-37 AID descriptions AID type AID Command-specific values Purpose ILAN1 ILAN2 COLAN X25 ALL Intershelf LAN-1 Intershelf LAN-2 Central office LAN X.25 All facility entities Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The NP facility to act on. Correlation tag
Note: An AID of ALL is supported but command execution will stop if the operation fails for one facility. In this case, enter each facility individually. Example input
ENT-FC
Use the Enter Fibre Channel command to provision a Fibre Channel facility (FC port) of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack. Note: The WAN facility on the GE/FC SFP of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack is created automatically when its corresponding FC facility is created. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-FC:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:::[,SUBRATE=Domain] [,EXTREACH=Domain][,SERVICE=Domain][,BBCOVERRIDE=Domain] [,COMPRESSION=Domain][PST-Q=Domain]; Table 3-38 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SUBRATE EXTREACH SERVICE BBCOVERRIDE COMPRESSION PST-Q Table 3-39 AID descriptions AID type FC AID Command-specific values Purpose FC-slot#-port# FC-slot#-ALL Identify the Fibre Channel facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Fibre Channel facility to provision. Correlation tag Determines whether or not service is carried over sub-rate bandwidth Extended reach mode of operation Type of service Buffer-to-buffer credit (BBC) override value Allows compression. Applies to the 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C only. Primary state qualifier
3-50 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-40 Parameter descriptions Parameter SUBRATE Possible values ENABLE DISABLE (default) EXTREACH ENABLE DISABLE (default) SERVICE FC100 (default) FICON BBCOVERRIDE 0 (default) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 IS (default) OOS-MA COMPRESSION ENABLE DISABLE (default) Example input Description Enable or disable the ability of the service to be carried over sub-rate bandwidth. Enable or disable the extended reach mode of operation. Set the service mode to FC100 or FICON. Set the buffer-to-buffer credit (BBC) override to 0 (no override), 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 or 256. Note that if EXTREACH is disabled, this attribute and the selected value are ignored.
PST-Q
Set the state of the facility to in-service (IS) or out-of-service management (OOS-MA). Enable or disable the compression mode of operation. Applicable only for the 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C.
Provision FC port 1 of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA as follows: the subrate is disabled the extended reach is disabled the service mode is set to FC100 the BBC override is set to 0
ENT-FC:OTTAWA:ETH-7-1:CTAG01:::SUBRATE=DISABLE, EXTREACH=DISABLE;SERVICE=FC100,BBCOVERRIDE=0;
ENT-FFP-OC12
The Enter FFP OC-12 command is used to set up 1+1 linear protection for OC-12 interfaces. The command also affects the operation of the SDCC in different ways depending on the current number of SDCC links configured on the pair of OC-12 interfaces targeted by this command. If two SDCC links are provisioned before 1+1 protection is set up, make sure the SDCC layer 2 parameters are the same for both links. If the parameters are not the same, the ENT-FFP-OC12 command will not complete. Note 1: If the craftperson attempts to modify optical protection through an FFP command, the command will be denied if the shelf has an active test access session. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-FFP-OC12:[TID]:workingOC12AID,protectionOC12AID:CTAG::: [PSDIRN=Domain]; Table 3-41 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG PSDIRN Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-12 to act on. Correlation tag Direction of protection group for OC-12 lines.
3-52 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-42 AID descriptions AID type working OC12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the slot number of the working OC-12 facility where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11 for OC-12 slot# = 3, 5, 7 or 9 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the slot number of the protection OC-12 facility where slot# = 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 for OC-12 slot# = 4, 6, 8, or 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 slot# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS
OC12-slot#-port#
Table 3-43 Parameter descriptions Parameter PSDIRN Possible values UNI BI Example input Description Unidirectional (default) Bidirectional
Provision unidirectional 1+1 protection for the pair of OC-12 circuit packs in slot 9 port 1 and slot 10 port 1:
ENT-FFP-OC12:NEWYORK:OC12-9-1,OC12-10-1:CTAG12:::PSDIRN=UNI;
ENT-FFP-OC192
The Enter FFP OC-192 command is used to set up protection for OC-192 interfaces. The command also affects the operation of the SDCC in different ways depending on the current number of SDCC links configured on the pair of OC-192 interfaces targeted by this command. If two SDCC links are provisioned before 1+1 protection is set up, make sure the SDCC layer 2 parameters are the same for both links. If the parameters are not the same, the ENT-FFP-OC192 command will not complete. Note 1: Ensure that facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-FFP-OC192:[TID]:workingOC192AID,protectionOC192AID:CTAG::: [PSDIRN=Domain][,PS=Domain][,WR=Domain]; Table 3-44 Syntax definition Field TID workingOC192AID protectionOC192AID CTAG PSDIRN PS WR Table 3-45 AID descriptions AID type workingOC192 AID protectionOC192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# OC192-slot# Purpose Identifies the slot number of the working OC-192 where slot# = 11 Identifies the slot number of the protection OC-192 where slot# = 12 Purpose Target identifier Working side access identifier. OC-192 to act on Protection side access identifier Correlation tag Protection switch direction for 1+1 linear systems Protection scheme Wait-to-restore period for BLSR systems
3-54 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-46 Parameter descriptions Parameter PSDIRN Possible values UNI BI PS 1PLUS1 BLSR_2FR WR n-MIN INFINITE Description Unidirectional (default) Bidirectional 1+1 protection (default) 2-Fiber BLSR protection Wait-to-restore period for BLSR systems (in minutes, or infinite for no time limit). n = an integer between 1 and 12. Default is 5-MIN.
Example input
Provision unidirectional 1+1 protection for the pair of OC-192 circuit packs in slots 11 and 12:
ENT-FFP-OC192:NEWYORK:OC192-11,OC192-12:CTAG12:::PSDIRN=UNI; Example input
Enter a BLSR protection for the pair of OC-192 circuit packs in slots 11 and 12 and set a wait to restore value of 1 minute:
ENT-FFP-OC192:NEWYORK:OC19211,OC192-12:CTAG12::: PS=BLSR_2FR,WR=1-MIN;
ENT-FFP-OC3
The Enter FFP OC-3 command is used to set up 1+1 linear protection for OC-3 interfaces. The command also affects the operation of the SDCC in different ways depending on the current number of SDCC links configured on the pair of OC-3 interfaces targeted by this command. If two SDCC links are provisioned before 1+1 protection is set up, make sure the SDCC layer 2 parameters are the same for both links. If the parameters are not the same, the ENT-FFP-OC3 command will not complete. Note 1: If the craftsperson attempts to modify optical protection through an FFP command, the command will be denied if the shelf has an active test access session. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-FFP-OC3:[TID]:workingOC3AID,protectionOC3AID:CTAG::: [PSDIRN=Domain]; Table 3-47 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG PSDIRN Table 3-48 AID descriptions AID type working OC3 AID Command-specific values Purpose OC3-slot#-port# Identify the slot number of the working OC-3 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Identify the slot number of the protection OC-3 where slot# = 4, 6, 8, 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-3 to act on. Correlation tag Direction of protection group for OC-3 lines.
3-56 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-49 Parameter descriptions Parameter PSDIRN Possible values UNI BI Example input Description Unidirectional (default) Bidirectional
Provision unidirectional 1+1 protection for the pair of OC-3 circuit packs in slot 9 port 1 and slot 10 port 1:
ENT-FFP-OC3:NEWYORK:OC3-9-1,OC3-10-1:CTAG12:::PSDIRN=UNI;
ENT-FFP-OC48
The Enter FFP OC-48 command is used to set up protection for OC-48 interfaces. The command also affects the operation of the SDCC in different ways depending on the current number of SDCC links configured on the pair of OC-48 interfaces targeted by this command. If two SDCC links are provisioned before 1+1 protection is set up, make sure the SDCC layer 2 parameters are the same for both links. If the parameters are not the same, the ENT-FFP-OC48 command will not complete. Note 1: Ensure that facilities on the protection circuit pack are out of service. Note 2: You cannot execute this command if there is an active test access session on this facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-FFP-OC48:[TID]:workingOC48AID,protectionOC48AID:CTAG::: [PSDIRN=Domain][,PS=Domain][,WR=Domain]; Table 3-50 Syntax definition Field TID workingOC48AID protectionOC48AID CTAG PSDIRN PS WR Purpose Target identifier Working side access identifier. OC-48 to act on Protection side access identifier Correlation tag Protection switch direction for 1+1 linear systems Protection scheme Wait-to-restore period for BLSR systems
3-58 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-51 AID descriptions AID type workingOC48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identifies the slot number of the working OC-48 facility where slot# = 11 for OC-48 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11 for OC-48 STS Identifies the slot number of the protection OC-48 facility where slot# = 12 for OC-48 slot# = 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 for OC-48 STS
protectionOC48 AID
OC48-slot#
Table 3-52 Parameter descriptions Parameter PSDIRN Possible values UNI BI PS 1PLUS1 BLSR_2FR WR n-MIN INFINITE Description Unidirectional (default) Bidirectional 1+1 protection (default) 2-Fiber BLSR protection Wait-to-restore period for BLSR systems (in minutes, or infinite for no time limit). n = an integer between 1 and 12. Default is 5-MIN.
Example input
Provision unidirectional 1+1 protection for the pair of OC-48 circuit packs in slots 11 and 12:
ENT-FFP-OC48:NEWYORK:OC48-11,OC48-12:CTAG12:::PSDIRN=UNI;
Enter a BLSR protection for the pair of OC-48 circuit packs in slots 11 and 12 and set a wait to restore value of 1 minute:
ENT-FFP-OC48:NEWYORK:OC48-11,OC48-12:CTAG12::: PS=BLSR_2FR,WR=1-MIN;
ENT-GRE
The Enter GRE command is used to create a GRE tunnel. This command is supported on the network processor only. The command can be used to create multiple GRE tunnels with unique IP and NSAP addresses. The maximum number of GRE tunnels supported is 26. GRE-0 is reserved for a connection to a head-end system (where the NPx is not the head-end). When GRE-0 is active, the COLAN is OOS-GRE and the GRE-0 acquires the COLANs ED-IP settings, namely: IPADDR, NETMASK, and GATEWAY. When using GRE-0, the ED-IP parameters must be set as if the NPx were directly connected to the head-end LAN. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-GRE:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[IPADDR]:[Netmask=<netmask>]: DEST=<nsap>; Table 3-53 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG IPADDR Purpose Target identifier GRE-0 to GRE-26 Correlation tag n.n.n.n (the IP address of the network element at the far-end of the GRE tunnel) Note: For GRE-0 an IP of 0.0.0.0 must be entered.
3-60 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-53 (continued) Syntax definition Field Netmask Purpose The netmask along with the IPADDR determines the range and number of IP addresses which are forwarded to the tunnel. 255.255.255.192 - 64 IP addresses 255.255.255.224 - 32 IP addresses 255.255.255.240 - 16 IP addresses 255.255.255.248 - 8IP addresses 255.255.255.252 - 4 IP addresses 255.255.255.254 - 2 IP addresses 255.255.255.255 - (Default) 1 IP address Note 1: For GRE-0, the default netmask (255.255.255.255) must be entered. Note 2: The sum of IP addresses for GRE-1 to GRE-26 must be less than or equal to 64. DEST OSI NSAP address of the destination NE (includes an NSEL of 00) DEST must be a hexadecimal number with a maximum of 40 digits. Note 1: GRE tunnels can only be created if the COLAN is IS or OOS-GRE, and if valid IP settings have been entered through the ED-IP command. Note 2: The IP/Netmask range for each tunnel must be unique and non-overlapping. Note 3: Multiple GRE tunnels can have the same DEST nsap. Note 4: When the NPx is a head-end, the NPx will proxy ARPs for all IP addresses within active GRE tunnels (GRE-1 to GRE-26). Note 5: When the NPx is a head-end, the user must not define a GRE tunnel for an IP address which is resident on the head-end NPx COLAN. Example input
ENT-IPT
Use the Enter IPT command to attach a Packet Edge circuit pack to a Resilient Packet Ring (RPR). Note 1: A Packet Edge circuit pack cannot be attached to an RPR until SONET bandwidth on both ends of the ring have been assigned. Note 2: A Packet Edge circuit pack can be attached to only one RPR. Note 3: 4x100BT, 4x100FX, and 2xGigE circuit packs can only be attached to RPRs with virtual concatenation (VCAT) disabled. 2xGigE 2.5G circuit packs can only be attached to RPRs with VCAT enabled. VCAT is disabled by default. See ENT-IPTR to set the VCAT mode. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-IPT:[TID]:IPTAID,IPTRAID:CTAG; Table 3-54 Syntax definition Field TID IPTAID CTAG IPTRAID Table 3-55 AID descriptions AID IPTAID Possible values Description IPT100-slot# 100FX-slot# 1GE-slot# Detach a 4x100BT circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 Detach a 4x100FX circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 Detach a 2xGigE circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for the double slot circuit packs slot# = 3 to 10 for the single slot circuit packs Detach a 2xGigE 2.5G circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 RPR entity to act upon where Index# = 1 to 8 Purpose Target identifier Circuit pack to act upon Correlation tag RPR to act upon
ENT-IPTR
Use the Enter IPTR command to create a Resilient Packet Ring (RPR). Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-IPTR:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[VCAT]; Table 3-56 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG VCAT Table 3-57 AID descriptions AID IPTR AID Possible values IPTR-Index# Description RPR entity to create where Index# = 1 to 8 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Virtual concatenation status
Table 3-58 Parameter descriptions Parameter VCAT Possible values ENABLE DISABLE (default) Example input Description Enable or disable virtual concatenation on the RPR.
ENT-LLSDCC
The Enter Lower Layer SDCC command is used to add a section data communications channel (SDCC) link (layers 1 and 2) to the indicated AID (equipment slot). The request is validated based on SDCCs already configured on the pair of slots (the number of SDCCs and the current SDCC protection scheme) and the circuit pack now provisioned in that slot or pair of slots. Upon SDCC provisioning, parameters are the default values. To change the provisioning defaults, see ED-LLSDCC on page 2-243. Note: The SDCC link on the DS1 DSM OC-3 facility has the provisioning default parameter, L2SIDE=USER. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-LLSDCC:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-59 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The equipment to retrieve SDCC information from. Correlation tag
Table 3-60 AID descriptions AID type OC-3 AID OC-12 AID OC-48 AID Command-specific Purpose values OC3-slot#-port# Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Identify the OC-12 where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12, 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-48 where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48, 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
OC12-slot#-port#
OC48-slot#
3-64 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-60 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Purpose values Identify the OC-192 where slot# = 11 or 12 Identify the EC-1 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, port# = 1 to 3
Add a lower layer SDCC link on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in slot 7, port 1:
ENT-LLSDCC:NEWYORK:OC3-7-1:CTAG13;
ENT-OC12
The Enter OC-12 command provisions and enters the attributes of an OC-12 facility in a network element. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[SDTH=Domain][,STFORMAT=Domain] [,STRC=Domain][,EXPSTRC=Domain][,STFMODE=Domain] [,SSBITMDE=Domain]:[PST],[SST]; Table 3-61 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SDTH Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-12 to act on. Correlation tag Signal degrade threshold. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
STFORMAT Section trace format. See Parameter descriptions table for details. STRC EXPSTRC STFMODE SSBITMDE PST SST Outgoing section trace message. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Expected section trace message. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace fail mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. SS bits mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Primary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Secondary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
Table 3-62 AID descriptions AID type OC12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# OC-12-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-12 facility where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS
3-66 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-63 Parameter descriptions Parameter SDTH Possible values 5 to 9 Description Translates to 10-5 to 10-9 (default is 6) Section trace message is 1 byte long (default) Section trace message is up to 15 bytes long If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up to If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note 1. EXPSTRC 0 to 255 If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up to If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note 1. STFMODE OFF ALMONLY SSBITMDE SONET SDH PST IS (see Note 2) OOS-MA SST AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA Alarms off, no traffic protection (default) Alarms on, no traffic protection SS bits operate in SONET mode (default) SS bits operate in SDH mode In service (default) Out of service maintenance for provisioning memory administration Auto in-service Auto in-service deactivated Test. See Note 2. Test Deactivated
Note 1: The Possible values of the section trace messages depend on the STFORMAT value. If STFORMAT is NUM, the Possible values are 0 to 255. If STFORMAT is STRING, the Possible values are any printable alphanumeric ASCII string up to 15 characters (except comma, colon, semi-colon, equal sign, or question mark) or a NULL character string (for example, STRC=, or EXPSTRC=,). Enclose the ASCII string in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. The string must begin and end with the double quotes. You cannot use double quotes, or any special character as part of the ASCII string. Note 2: Test access secondary state is supported in slots 3 through 10 only. Example input
Set the primary state of the OC-12 facility in slot 7 port 1 to in-service, with a section trace format value of STRING, an outgoing section trace value of Abc123, and SSBITMDE set to SONET:
ENT-OC12:SEATTLE:OC12-7-1:CTAG12:::STFORMAT=STRING, STRC=Abc123,SSBITMDE=SONET:IS; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
ENT-OC192
The Enter OC-192 command provisions and enters the attributes of an OC-192 facility in a network element. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[SDTH=Domain][,STFORMAT=Domain] [,STRC=Domain][,EXPSTRC=Domain][,STFMODE=Domain] [,SSBITMDE=Domain]:[PST],[SST]; Table 3-64 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SDTH STFORMAT STRC EXPSTRC STFMODE SSBITMDE PST SST Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-192 to act on. Correlation tag Signal degrade threshold. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace format. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Outgoing section trace value. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Expected incoming section trace value. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace fail mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. SS bit mode for optical signal. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Primary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Secondary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
Table 3-65 AID descriptions AID type OC192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# Purpose Identify the OC-192 facility where slot# = 11, 12
3-68 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-66 Parameter descriptions Parameter SDTH Possible values 5 to 9 Description Translates to 10-5 to 10-9 (default is 6) An integer 1 byte long (default) An ASCII string up to 15 bytes long If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null character to 15 characters string). See Note 1. EXPSTRC 0 to 255 If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null character to 15 characters string). See Note 1. STFMODE OFF ALMONLY LINEFAIL SSBITMDE SONET SDH PST IS (see Note 2) OOS-MA Alarms off, no traffic protection (default) Alarms on, no traffic protection Alarms on, traffic protection Optical signal transmitted is SONET format (default) Optical signal transmitted is SDH format In service (default) Out of service - memory administration
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-69 Table 3-66 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter SST Possible values AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA Description Auto in-service Auto in-service deactivated Test. See Note 2. Test Deactivated
Note 1: The Possible values of the section trace messages depend on the STFORMAT value. If STFORMAT is NUM, the Possible values are 0 to 255. If STFORMAT is STRING, the Possible values are any printable alphanumeric ASCII string up to 15 characters (except comma, colon, semi-colon, equal sign, or question mark) or a NULL character string (for example, STRC=, or EXPSTRC=,). Enclose the ASCII string in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. The string must begin and end with the double quotes. You cannot use double quotes, or any special character as part of the ASCII string. Note 2: Test access secondary state is supported in slots 3 through 10 only. Example input
Set the primary state of the OC-192 facility in slot 11 to an in-service state with a section trace format value of STRING and an outgoing section trace value of Abc123 and the SSBITMDE to SONET:
ENT-OC192:SEATTLE:OC192-11:CTAG12:::STFORMAT=STRING, STRC=Abc123,SSBITMDE=SONET:IS;
ENT-OC3
The Enter OC-3 command provisions and enters the attributes of an OC-3 facility in a network element. Note: This command is not supported for Host prov-link OC-3 facility, and DSM TM OC-3 line facility. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[SDTH=Domain][,STFORMAT=Domain] [,STRC=Domain][,EXPSTRC=Domain][,STFMODE=Domain] [,SSBITMDE=Domain][,REMOTE=Domain]:[PST],[SST]; Table 3-67 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SDTH STFORMAT STRC EXPSTRC STFMODE SSBITMDE REMOTE PST SST Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-3 to act on. Correlation tag Signal degrade threshold. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace format. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Outgoing section trace message. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Expected section trace message. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace fail mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. SS bits mode Type of node at remote end (for section trace purposes). See Parameter descriptions table for details. Primary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Secondary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-71 Table 3-68 AID descriptions AID type OC3 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port# OC3-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4
Table 3-69 Parameter descriptions Parameter SDTH Possible values 5 to 9 Description Translates to 10-5 to 10-9 (default is 6) Section trace message is 1 byte long (default) Section trace message is up to 15 bytes long If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up to If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note. EXPSTRC 0 to 255 If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up to If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null 15 characters character string). See Note. STFMODE OFF ALMONLY SSBITMDE SONET SDH REMOTE EXPRESS OC48 IS PST (see Note 2) OOS-MA Alarms off, no traffic protection (default) Alarms on, no traffic protection SS bits operate in SONET mode (default) SS bits operate in SDH mode Optical Metro node (default) OC-48 node In service (default) Out of service maintenance for provisioning memory administration
3-72 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-69 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter SST Possible values AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA Description Auto in-service Auto in-service deactivated Test Test Deactivated
Note: The Possible values of the section trace messages depend on the STFORMAT value. If STFORMAT is NUM, the Possible values are 0 to 255. If STFORMAT is STRING, the Possible values are any printable alphanumeric ASCII string up to 15 characters (except comma, colon, semi-colon, equal sign, or question mark) or a NULL character string (for example, STRC=, or EXPSTRC=,). Enclose the ASCII string in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. The string must begin and end with the double quotes. You cannot use double quotes, or any special character as part of the ASCII string. Example input
Set the primary state of the OC-3 facility in slot 10 port 1 to an in-service state with a section trace format value of STRING and an outgoing section trace value of Abc123 and the SSBITMDE to SONET:
ENT-OC3:SEATTLE:OC3-10-1:CTAG12:::STFORMAT=STRING, STRC=Abc123,SSBITMDE=SONET:IS;
ENT-OC48
The Enter OC-48 command provisions and enters the attributes of an OC-48 facility in a network element. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[SDTH=Domain][,STFORMAT=Domain] [,STRC=Domain][,EXPSTRC=Domain][,STFMODE=Domain] [,SSBITMDE=Domain]:[PST],[SST]; Table 3-70 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SDTH STFORMAT STRC EXPSTRC STFMODE SSBITMDE PST SST Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-48 to act on. Correlation tag Signal degrade threshold. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace format. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Outgoing section trace value. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Expected incoming section trace value. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Section trace fail mode. See Parameter descriptions table for details. SS bit mode for optical signal. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Primary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Secondary state. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
Table 3-71 AID descriptions AID type OC48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identify the OC-48 facility where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
3-74 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-72 Parameter descriptions Parameter SDTH Possible values 5 to 9 Description Translates to 10-5 to 10-9 (default is 6) An integer 1 byte long (default) An ASCII string up to 15 bytes long If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null character to 15 characters string). See Note 1. EXPSTRC 0 to 255 If STFORMAT is NUM (default is 1)
ASCII string up If STFORMAT is STRING (default is null character to 15 characters string). See Note 1. STFMODE OFF ALMONLY LINEFAIL SSBITMDE SONET SDH PST IS (see Note 2) OOS-MA SST AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA Alarms off, no traffic protection (default) Alarms on, no traffic protection Alarms on, traffic protection SS bits operate in SONET mode (default) SS bits operate in SDH mode In service (default) Out of service - memory administration Auto in-service Auto in-service deactivated Test. See Note 2. Test Deactivated
Note 1: The Possible values of the section trace messages depend on the STFORMAT value. If STFORMAT is NUM, the Possible values are 0 to 255. If STFORMAT is STRING, the Possible values are any printable alphanumeric ASCII string up to 15 characters (except comma, colon, semi-colon, equal sign, or question mark) or a NULL character string (for example, STRC=, or EXPSTRC=,). Enclose the ASCII string in double quotes () to maintain case sensitivity. The string must begin and end with the double quotes. You cannot use double quotes, or any special character as part of the ASCII string. Note 2: Test access secondary state is supported in slots 3 through 10 only. Example input
Set the primary state of the OC-48 facility in slot 11 to an in-service state with a section trace format value of STRING and an outgoing section trace value of Abc123 and the SSBITMDE to SONET:
ENT-OC48:SEATTLE:OC48-11:CTAG12:::STFORMAT=STRING, STRC=Abc123,SSBITMDE=SONET:IS; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
ENT-RINGMAP
Use the Enter Ring Map command to enter map information for a managed or unmanaged node in a BLSR ring. This command is supported on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-RINGMAP:[TID]:AID:CTAG::SID,APSID,WEST-AID,EAST-AID, WEST-APSID,EAST-APSID; Table 3-73 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SID APSID WEST EAST WEST-APSID EAST-APSID Table 3-74 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify ring name Purpose Target identifier Ring name Correlation tag Node name APS ID of the node West optics slot number East optics slot number APS ID of the west adjacent node APS ID of the east adjacent node
3-76 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-75 Parameter descriptions Parameter SID APSID WEST Possible values An alphanumeric string between 1 and 20 characters An integer between 0 and 15 OCn-slot# where n is 48 or 192 where slot# = 11 or 12 OCn-slot# where n is 48 or 192 where slot# = 11 or 12 An integer between 0 and 15 An integer between 0 and 15 Description Node name APS ID of the node Slot number of the nodes west optics Slot number of the nodes east optics APS ID of the west adjacent node APS ID of the east adjacent node
EAST
ENT-ROLL-STS1
The Enter Rollover STS-1 command is used to define a new connection to which to rollover an existing termination point in an STS-1 path. If you try to execute an inservice rollover command on a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you get the message Status, data not consistent. To rollover a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you must convert each 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect to a 1WAY cross-connect with the ED-CRS command rollover the endpoint of each 1WAY cross-connect convert each 1WAY cross-connect back to a 1WAYPR cross-connect with the ED-CRS command Note: Rollovers must be performed one connection at a time. Bulk rollovers are not supported. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-ROLL-STS1:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,SWMATE=AID]; Table 3-76 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID SWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate Used to bridge the switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
3-78 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-77 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on a DS3 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3/EC-1x12 Identify the DSM or MS DSM facility on a DS3 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5 port# = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3
DS3-slot#-port#%HLINK-Hline-hslot#hport#
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-79 Table 3-77 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 facility on an EC-1 circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to RFROM, RTO, and SWMATE. Table 3-78 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values CCT 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
EC1-slot#-port#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
Rollover an STS1 connection and its switch mate on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between a DS3 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original working OC-3 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1,DS3-3-1:A::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1,VALID=Y;
ENT-ROLL-STS12C
The Enter Rollover STS12C command is used to define a new connection to which to rollover an existing termination point in a STS-12c path. If you try to execute an inservice rollover command on a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you get the message Status, data not consistent. To rollover a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you must convert each 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect to a 1WAY cross-connect with the ED-CRS command rollover the endpoint of each 1WAY cross-connect convert each 1WAY cross-connect back to a 1WAYPR cross-connect with the ED-CRS command Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-ROLL-STS12C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,SWMATE=AID]; Table 3-79 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID SWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate Used to bridge the switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
3-82 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-80 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 Identify the STS-12c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 Identify the STS-12c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or the 2xGigE-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1 Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to the RFROM and RTO fields. Table 3-81 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values CCT 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
Rollover an STS12C connection and its switch mate on the OC-12 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-12 service and the OC-12 circuit pack. Bridge the original working OC-12 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS12C:OTTAWA:OC12-9-1-1,OC12-10-1-1:A::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC12-9-1-1,RTO=OC12-7-1-1,VALID=Y;
ENT-ROLL-STS24C
The Enter Rollover STS24C command is used to define a new connection to which to rollover an existing termination point in a STS-24c path. If you try to execute an inservice rollover command on a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you get the message Status, data not consistent. To rollover a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you must convert each 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect to a 1WAY cross-connect with the ED-CRS command rollover the endpoint of each 1WAY cross-connect convert each 1WAY cross-connect back to a 1WAYPR cross-connect with the ED-CRS command Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-ROLL-STS24C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,SWMATE=AID]; Table 3-82 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID SWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate Used to bridge the switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-85 Table 3-83 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-48 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 Identify the STS-24c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ... 169 Identify the STS-24c facility on the WAN port of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1 Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to the RFROM and RTO fields. Table 3-84 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values CCT 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
Rollover an STS24C connection and its switch mate on the OC-48 STS circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-48 STS circuit pack and another OC-48 STS circuit pack. Bridge the original working OC-48 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS24C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1-1,OC48-10-1-1:A::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1-1,RTO=OC48-7-1-1,VALID=Y;
ENT-ROLL-STS3C
The Enter Rollover STS3C command is used to define a new connection to which to rollover an existing termination point in a STS-3c path. If you try to execute an inservice rollover command on a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you get the message Status, data not consistent. To rollover a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you must convert each 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect to a 1WAY cross-connect with the ED-CRS command rollover the endpoint of each 1WAY cross-connect convert each 1WAY cross-connect back to a 1WAYPR cross-connect with the ED-CRS command Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-ROLL-STS3C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,SWMATE=AID]; Table 3-85 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID SWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate Used to bridge the switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
3-88 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-86 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-3 circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack where slot# =11, 12 for OC-48, 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 46 Identify the STS-3c facility on an OC-192 circuit pack where slot# =11, 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 190 Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, or 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1, 4, 7, ... 19 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to RFROM, RTO, and SWMATE.
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-89 Table 3-86 AID descriptions AID type MS DSM WAN AID Command-specific values Purpose
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#- Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port %HLINK-Hline-Hslot- where slot# = 3 to 6 Hport port# = 1 to 8 sts# = 1 Hline# = OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Note: The WAN AID only applies to the fromAID and toAID fields. The WAN AID does not apply to RFROM, RTO, and SWMATE.
Table 3-87 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
Rollover an STS-3c connection and its switch mate on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-3 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original working OC-3 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS3C:OTTAWA:OC3-9-1-1,OC3-10-1-1:A::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-1-1,RTO=OC3-7-1-1,VALID=Y;
ENT-ROLL-STS48C
The Enter Rollover STS48C command is used to define a new connection to which to rollover an existing termination point in a STS-48c path. If you try to execute an inservice rollover command on a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you get the message Status, data not consistent. To rollover a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you must convert each 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect to a 1WAY cross-connect with the ED-CRS command rollover the endpoint of each 1WAY cross-connect convert each 1WAY cross-connect back to a 1WAYPR cross-connect with the ED-CRS command Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-ROLL-STS48C:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,SWMATE=AID]; Table 3-88 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID SWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate Used to bridge the switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
3-92 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-89 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 slot# =11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, 97, ... 145
Table 3-90 Parameter descriptions Parameter CCT Possible values 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) Description Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
Rollover an STS48C connection and its switch mate on the OC-48 STS circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between an OC-48 STS circuit pack and another OC-48 STS circuit pack. Bridge the original working OC-48 connection:
ENT-ROLL-STS48C:OTTAWA:OC48-9-1-1,OC48-10-1-1:A::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC48-9-1-1,RTO=OC48-7-1-1,VALID=Y;
ENT-ROLL-VT1
The Enter Rollover VT1 command is used to define a new connection to which to rollover an existing termination point in a VT1.5 path. If you try to execute an inservice rollover command on a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you get the message Status, data not consistent. To rollover a 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect, you must convert each 1WAYPR multicast cross-connect to a 1WAY cross-connect with the ED-CRS command rollover the endpoint of each 1WAY cross-connect convert each 1WAY cross-connect back to a 1WAYPR cross-connect with the ED-CRS command Note: Rollovers must be performed one connection at a time. Bulk rollovers are not supported. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-ROLL-VT1:[TID]:fromAID,toAID:CTAG::CCT: RFROM=Domain,RTO=Domain[,VALID=Domain][,SWMATE=AID]; Table 3-91 Syntax definition Field TID fromAID toAID CTAG CCT RFROM RTO VALID SWMATE Purpose Target identifier, the network element to which the command is directed One of the original cross-connection endpoints Second of the original cross-connection endpoints Correlation tag, a user created alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Connection type to be rolled The fromAID or toAID to be rolled (see Note) AID RFROM is to be rolled to (see Note) Command execution will be denied if the conditions on the node are inappropriate Used to bridge the switch mate in a 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYBR circuit
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-95 Table 3-92 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 4 to 10 port# = 1 to 12 grp = 1 to 3 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DS1 service module facility where port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 DS1 service module facility where grp# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 MS DSM facility where port# = 1 to 84 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
DS1-1-DFLT-grp#-%HLINK-OC3hslot#-hport#
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-Hline-hslot#hport#
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL
3-96 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-92 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port# = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 for sts# = 1 or 2 vtg# = 1 or 2 for sts# = 3 vt# = 1 to 4
EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# EC1-slot#-port#-ALL
Table 3-93 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values Description CCT 1WAY 2WAY 1WAYPR 2WAYPR 2WAYBR VALID Y N (default) Unidirectional connection Bidirectional connection 1WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY path ring, fromAID must be optical 2WAY bridge ring, fromAID must be optical Bridge will be performed regardless of the condition of the switched-to path. Bridge will be denied if conditions on the node are inappropriate.
Rollover a VT1.5 working connection and its switch mate on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in a 2WAYPR circuit between a DS1 service and the OC-3x4 circuit pack. Bridge the original working OC-3 connection:
ENT-ROLL-VT1:OTTAWA:OC3-9-2-1-7-1,DS1-4-4:A::2WAYPR: RFROM=OC3-9-2-1-7-1,RTO=OC3-9-3-1-7-1,VALID=Y;
ENT-SECU-ACCESS
The Enter Security Access command is used to add network elements to the allow or deny access control list of the specified network element or network processor. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
ENT-SECU-ACCESS:[TID]::CTAG::SID,[ACCESS]; Table 3-94 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG SID ACCESS Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Source identifier of the network element to add. Grouping is allowed. Add network elements to the allow list or to the deny list
Table 3-95 Parameter descriptions Parameter ACCESS Possible values ALLOW DENY (default) Example input Description Add network elements to the allow list Add network elements to the deny list
Add network element OTTAWA to the allow list of network element MONTREAL:
ENT-SECU-ACCESS:MONTREAL::CTAG1::OTTAWA,ALLOW;
ENT-SECU-BADPID
The Enter Security Bad Password command is used to add words to a list of unusable passwords on the network element or network processor. You can add up to 50 words to the list. If you try to add more than 50, an error code is returned. Duplicate words are not added. Words to add to a list of unusable passwords might be locally used names and acronyms. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
ENT-SECU-BADPID:[TID]::CTAG::BADPID[&BADPID2]..[&BADPID3];
Note 1: ALL is a valid target identifier (TID). Note 2: The length of the command, including the syntax, cannot exceed 234 characters. If you require more characters to enter all the unusable passwords, issue the command again.
Table 3-96 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG BADPID Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Word to add to the list of unusable passwords. A string between eight and ten alphanumeric characters. Grouping is allowed. Example input
Add the words NORTEL951 and EXPRESS951 to the list of unusable passwords on network element OTTAWA:
ENT-SECU-BADPID:OTTAWA::CTAG98::NORTEL951&EXPRESS951;
ENT-SECU-USER
The Enter Security User command is used to create a new user account on a network element or network processor and enter the security parameters associated with the account. The network element or network processor is specified by the TID. Note: Password identifiers (PIDs) must meet the guidelines listed under ED-SECU-PID on page 2-314. A maximum of 100 UIDs can be added to the password file. If you try to create UID 101, the error message /*Status, List Exceeds Maximum*/ is displayed. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
ENT-SECU-USER:[TID]:NEWUID:CTAG::NEWPID,NEWPID,UPC: TMOUTA=Domain[,TMOUT=Domain][PAGESTAT=Domain][,PAGE=Domain] [,ACCRSTAT=Domain][,ACCR=Domain][,PCND=Domain] [,MINW=Domain][,USERTYPE=Domain];
Note 1: ALL is a valid target identifier (TID). Note 2: Passwords do not appear on screen. Note 3: Passwords must be entered twice for confirmation.
Table 3-97 Syntax definition Field TID NEWUID CTAG NEWPID UPC TMOUTA Purpose Target identifier User identifier Correlation tag Password identifier User privilege code Automatic timeout flag. The user is automatically logged off from the network element if no valid TL1 command is sent within the specified TMOUT interval. Timeout interval in minutes. A decimal number from 1 to 99. The default is 30 minutes. Password aging status Password aging time Password accreditation status
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-101 Table 3-97 (continued) Syntax definition Field ACCR PCND MINW USERTYPE Purpose Password accreditation time Early warning time Minimum waiting time User account type
Table 3-98 Parameter descriptions Parameter TMOUTA Possible values Y Description Timeout enabled. If TMOUTA is enabled and the TMOUT interval is not specified, the default is 30 minutes. Timeout disabled. The user will never be automatically logged off. TMOUT is irrelevant (set to 0 minutes). Timeout interval in minutes (default is 30). Turn off password aging. Turn on password aging. Password aging time in days (default is 45). Turn off password accreditation. Turn on password accreditation. Password accreditation time in days. The amount of time a user has to change a password that was assigned to the user account. The default is 0, which means that a password must be changed the day it is assigned to the user. Early warning time in days (default is 14). The number of days before a password expires that the user is given a warning when logging into the network element.
TMOUT PAGESTAT
1 to 99 OFF (default) ON
PAGE ACCRSTAT
ACCR
0 to 30
PCND
0 to 14
3-102 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-98 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MINW Possible values 0 to 999 Description The minimum number of days that a user must wait before changing a password (default is 0). Note: This parameter applies even when password aging or password accreditation is turned off. However, this parameter does not apply when the password has been assigned and password accreditation is turned on. USERTYPE 0 1 Local Network
Note: You can create a temporary account by setting PAGESTAT=ON, ACCTSTAT=OFF, PAGE=X, and MINW=X+1. Example input
Create an account on network element Seattle, with user name CAM, password VWXYZ123, security privilege level 3, and timeout disabled:
ENT-SECU-USER:SEATTLE:CAM:CTAG12::VWXYZ123,VWXYZ123,3: TMOUTA=N;
Create an account on network element Seattle, with user name CAM, password VWXYZ123, security privilege level 3, timeout set to 60 minutes, an aging time of 30 days, an accreditation period of 20 days, and an early warning time of 7 days:
ENT-SECU-USER:SEATTLE:CAM:CTAG12::VWXYZ123,VWXYZ123,3: TMOUTA=Y,TMOUT=60,PAGESTAT=ON,PAGE=30,ACCRSTAT=ON,ACCR=20, PCND=7;
ENT-T1
The Enter T1 command is used to enter the attributes of a DS1 facility in a network element. To modify DS1 facilities once they have been created, use the ED-T1 command. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[EQLZ=Domain][,FENDNTE=Domain] [,FLMDE=Domain][,FMT=Domain][,LINECDE=Domain][,MAP=Domain] [,OMODE=Domain]][,NIU=Domain]:[PST],[SST],[AINS-TIME]; Table 3-99 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG EQLZ=Domain FENDNTE=Domain FLMDE=Domain FMT=Domain LINECDE=Domain MAP=Domain OMODE=Domain NIU=Domain PST SST AINS-TIME Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS1s to act on. Correlation tag Facility signal attribute parameters. See the Parameter descriptions table on page 3-104.
3-104 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-100 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID Command-specific values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-ALL DS3-slot#-port#-t1# DS3-slot#-port#-ALL Purpose Identify the DS1s where slot# =4 to 10, port# =1 to 28 Identify the DS3s where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 Identify the DS1 port on DSM or MS DSM where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 All DS1 ports on the DSM or MS DSM where HLINE = OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
DS3 AID
DSM AID
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
DS1-1-ALL-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
Table 3-101 Parameter descriptions Parameter EQLZ Possible values Description Cable connecting T1 to DS1 cross-connect. If the cables for the incoming and outgoing streams are different, add TX or RX to the domain, for example 1RX or 2TX. 1, 2 and 3 set the values for both TX and RX cables. 1 1TX 1RX 2 2TX 2RX 3 3TX 3RX FENDNTE ANSI NOTANSI Default: short: 0-220 ft both directions 0 to 220 ft transmit 0 to 220 ft receive medium: 220 to 430 ft both directions 220 to 430 ft transmit 220 to 430 ft receive long: 430 to 655 ft both directions 430 to 655 ft transmit 430 to 655 ft receive Default: Far end NTE supports ANSI standards ANSI standards are not supported
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-105 Table 3-101 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter FLMDE BOTH Possible values Description Fault locate mode: Faults in the frame format that will be checked for. Use N if DS1 data is unframed. Default: both incoming and outgoing data streams will have the frame format, as specified by FMT, checked. Only check incoming data. (Outgoing can be unframed.) Only check outgoing data. Do not check the frame format. (The DS1 facility can be unframed or used as a clear channel facility.) Default: Superframe format Extended Superframe format Superframe with TR08 extensions Line code. If the incoming and outgoing streams are different, add TX or RX to the domain, for example AMITX, B8ZSRX. Note: For the MS DSM, legacy coding parameters AMITX, AMIRX, B8ZSTX, B8ZSRX are supported when used in the same group. For example AMITX can be used only with AMIRX and not B8ZSRX. Provisioning of AMITX and AMIRX will be retrieved as AMI. The same is true for B8ZS coding group. AMIZCSTX parameter is not supported on MS DSM. AMI AMITX AMIRX AMIZCS Default: Alternate mark inversion (bipolar) both directions AMI transmit AMI receive AMI with zero code suppression, both directions If there are 8 zeros in a byte, the least significant will be changed to a one. AMIZCS transmit Note: Zero code suppression is not supported in the receive direction. B8ZS B8ZSTX B8ZSRX Bipolar with 8-zero substitution, both directions B8ZS Transmit B8ZS Receive
INC OC N
FMT
SF ESF SF-TR08
LINECDE
AMIZCSTX
3-106 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-101 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MAP VTASYN VTBYTE VTBIT Possible values Description The form of mapping for DS1 payloads into VT1.5s. Default:VT1.5 bit asynchronous mapping VT1.5 byte synchronous mapping VT1.5 bit synchronous mapping Note: Only VTBYTE and VTASYN mappings are supported by T1 facilities on MS DSM. If using VTBYTE mapping, one or both of these mappings can also be specified: SIGNLIN SIGNLOUT Robbed bit signaling bits are transported. Out slot (S1-S4) signaling bits are transported. Note 1: You must enter each MAP parameter in a separate command. Note 2: DS1 facilities on the DSM and MS DSM do not support SIGNLIN and SIGNLOUT. OMODE NORM IDLE AZC NIU N Y PST (primary state) SST IS OOS-MA AINS AINS-DEA TS TS-DEA Output mode: Default: The outgoing stream is a regular DS1 The outgoing stream is set to an idle code: repeating 1100 The outgoing stream will have any AIS code changed to all-zeros. DS1 facility does not support NIU feature (default). DS1 facility does support NIU feature. In service (default) Out of service maintenance Auto in-service Auto in-service deactivated Test Test Deactivate
Provision the DS1 facility on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 4 port 7 and set its TX EQLZ value:
ENT-T1:NEWYORK:DS1-4-7:CTAG23:::EQLZ=2TX;
Provision all the DS1 facilities on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 6 and set their LINECDE values to use B8ZS:
ENT-T1:NEWYORK:DS1-6-ALL:CTAG23:::LINECDE=B8ZS;
Provision the DS1 facility on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 4 port 7, overruling the defaults for EQLZ (it is a long cable, not a short one) and FMT (the framing is extended superframe):
ENT-T1:NEWYORK:DS1-4-7:CTAG23:::EQLZ=3,FMT=ESF;
Provision all the DS1 facilities on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 6 and set their MAP values to use VTBYTE:
ENT-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-6-ALL:CTAG23:::MAP=VTBYTE;
ENT-T3
The Enter T3 command is used to enter the attributes of a DS3 facility in a network element. To modify DS3 facilities once they have been created, use the ED-T3 command. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
ENT-T3:[TID]:AID:CTAG:::[LBO=Domain][,NIU=Domain[,FMT=Domain]: [PST],[SST],[AINS-TIME]; Table 3-102 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LBO NIU FMT PST SST AINS-TIME Table 3-103 AID descriptions AID type T3 AID Command-specific values Purpose DS3-slot#-port# DS3-slot#-ALL Identify the DS3s where slot# =3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3VTx12 slot# = 3 or 5; port# = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to10 Hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS3s to act on. Correlation tag Line buildout Network interface unit Frame format Primary state Secondary state DS1 auto-in-service time
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-109 Table 3-104 Parameter descriptions Parameter FMT Possible values ASYNC UNFR CBIT NIU N Y Description M13, multiplex framed (default) Unframed clear channel C-bit parity DS3 facility does not support NIU feature (default) DS3 facility does support NIU feature. DS3 cross-connects must be present to activate the feature. 0 to 224 ft to DS3 cross-connect 225 to 450 ft to DS3 cross-connect In service (default) Out of service maintenance for provisioning memory administration Auto in-service Auto in-service deactivated Test Test deactivated Amount of time that an error-free signal must be present on the DS1 line in order for the auto-in-service state to clear. If an error-free signal is present for less than this period of time, the DS1 facility remains in an auto-in-service state. Default = 04-00 (4 hours) HH= 00-96 MM=00-59 Example input
LBO
1 (default) 2
PST
IS OOS-MA
SST
AINS-TIME
Provision a DS3 facility on the DS3 circuit pack in slot 5 port 1 with a line buildout of 225 ft and the frame format to unframed:
ENT-T3:NEWYORK:DS3-5-1:CTAG23:::LBO=2,FMT=UNFR;
EX-SW-OC12
The Exercise Switch OC-12 command is used to run the exerciser to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-12 line switching. The high-speed exerciser is a routine that tests the integrity of the protection switching bytes (K-bytes) communication between an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS pair configured in a linear 1+1 protected system. The exerciser can run automatically on a predetermined schedule, or it can be initiated manually. The exerciser runs on a pair of OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit packs or on all OC-12/OC-12x4 STS circuit packs in the shelf that are in an in-service state. The pair must be in 1+1 protection for the exerciser to work. Note: If the circuit packs are in a 1+1 linear configuration, there must not be an active protection switch. The exerciser is the lowest priority user command and does not run if a higher priority feature or command is in effect. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
EX-SW-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-105 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-106 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the OC-12 facility where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the MS DSM OC-12 facility where slot# = 1 or 2 Hslot# = 3 to 10 Hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
MS DSM AID
OC12-slot#-1-%HLINK-OC12Hslot#-Hport#
Run the exerciser on network element OTTAWA and report results of all exercises:
EX-SW-OC12:OTTAWA:OC12-9-1:CTAG23;
Possible values for <RSLT> are: FAIL the exercise has determined unit failure PASS the exercise found no problem in the unit
EX-SW-OC192
The Exercise Switch OC-192 command is used to run the exerciser to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-192 line switching. The high-speed exerciser is a routine that tests the integrity of the protection switching bytes (K-bytes) communication between an OC-192 pair configured in a linear 1+1 or BLSR protected system. The exerciser can run automatically on a predetermined schedule, or it can be initiated manually. The exerciser runs on a pair of in-service OC-192 circuit packs. The pair must be in 1+1 or BLSR protection for the exerciser to work. Note 1: If the OC-192 circuit packs are in a BLSR configuration, they must also have a valid BLSR configuration and no active protection switch. Note 2: If the OC-192 circuit packs are in a 1+1 linear configuration, there must not be an active protection switch. The exerciser is the lowest priority user command and does not run if a higher priority feature or command is in effect. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
422EX-SW-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-107 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-108 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# Purpose Identify the OC-192 facility where slot# = 11 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Run the exerciser on network element OTTAWA and report results of all exercises:
EX-SW-OC192:OTTAWA:OC192-11:CTAG23;
Possible values for <RSLT> are: FAIL the exercise has determined unit failure PASS the exercise found no problem in the unit
EX-SW-OC3
The Exercise Switch OC-3 command is used to run the exerciser to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-3 line switching. The high-speed exerciser is a routine that tests the integrity of the protection switching bytes (K-bytes) communication between an OC-3 pair configured in a linear 1+1 protected system. The exerciser can run automatically on a predetermined schedule, or it can be initiated manually. The exerciser runs on a pair of OC-3x4 circuit packs or on all OC-3x4 circuit packs in the shelf that are in an in-service state. The pair must be in 1+1 protection for the exerciser to work. Note: If the OC-3x4 circuit packs are in a 1+1 linear configuration, there must not be an active protection switch. The exerciser is the lowest priority user command and does not run if a higher priority feature or command is in effect. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
EX-SW-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-109 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-110 AID descriptions AID type OC-3 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, and 9 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 slot# = 1 or 2 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
OC3-slot-1-%HLINK-OC3hslot-hport
Run the exerciser on network element OTTAWA and report results of all exercises:
EX-SW-OC3:OTTAWA:OC3-10-2:CTAG23;
Possible values for <RSLT> are: FAIL the exercise has determined unit failure PASS the exercise found no problem in the unit
EX-SW-OC48
The Exercise Switch OC-48 command is used to run the exerciser to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-48 line switching. The high-speed exerciser is a routine that tests the integrity of the protection switching bytes (K-bytes) communication between an OC-48 or OC-48 STS pair configured in a linear 1+1 or BLSR protected system. The exerciser can run automatically on a predetermined schedule, or it can be initiated manually. The exerciser runs on a pair of OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit packs or on all OC-48/OC-48 STS circuit packs in the shelf that are in an in-service state. The pair must be in 1+1 or BLSR protection for the exerciser to work. Note 1: If the circuit packs are in a BLSR configuration, they must also have a valid BLSR configuration and no active protection switch. Note 2: If the circuit packs are in a 1+1 linear configuration, there must not be an active protection switch. The exerciser is the lowest priority user command and does not run if a higher priority feature or command is in effect. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
EX-SW-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-111 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-112 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identify the OC-48 facility where slot# = 11 for OC-48 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 for OC-48 STS Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Run the exerciser on network element OTTAWA and report results of all exercises:
EX-SW-OC48:OTTAWA:OC48-11:CTAG23;
Possible values for <RSLT> are: FAIL the exercise has determined unit failure PASS the exercise found no problem in the unit
INH-EX-OC12
The Inhibit Exercise OC-12 command is used to prevent the exerciser from running to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-12 line switching. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
INH-EX-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-113 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-114 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# OC12-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-12 facility where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
MS-DSM AID
OC12-slot-1-%HLINK-OC12Hslot-Hport
Example input
INH-EX-OC192
The Inhibit Exercise OC-192 command is used to prevent the exerciser from running to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-192 line switching. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
INH-EX-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-115 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-116 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# OC192-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-192 facility where slot# = 11 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Example input
INH-EX-OC3
The INH-EX-OC3 command is used to prevent the exerciser from running to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-3 line switching. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
INH-EX-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-117 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-118 AID descriptions AID type OC-3 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#- port# OC3-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, and 9 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
DS1 service OC3-slot-1-%HLINK-OC3-hslot- slot# = 1 or 2 module OC-3 hport hslot# = 3 to 10 Facility AID or hport# = 1 to 4 MS DSM OC-3 Facility AID Example input
INH-EX-OC48
The Inhibit Exercise OC-48 command is used to prevent the exerciser from running to test the different protection mechanisms associated with OC-48 line switching. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
INH-EX-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-119 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-120 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# OC48-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-48 facility where slot# = 11 for OC-48 slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 for OC-48 STS Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Example input
INH-MSG-ALL
The Inhibit Messages All command is used to stop all REPT^ALM, REPT^ALM^ENV, REPT^EVT and REPT^EX autonomous messages. It is meant to be used during maintenance to keep the terminal screen uncluttered. When a TL1 session begins, REPT^ALM, REPT^ALM^ENV and REPT^EVT messages are allowed by default. To resume messages see ALW-MSG-ALL. Note: The Inhibit Messages All command does not inhibit REPT^EVT^LOG and REPT^EVT^INVENTORY autonomous messages. To inhibit these autonomous messages, use the INH-MSG-BROADCAST command. Security level Level 1 Input syntax
INH-MSG-ALL:[TID]:[ALL]:CTAG;
INH-MSG-BROADCAST
The Inhibit Messages Broadcast command instructs the network element or network processor to inhibit REPT^DBCHG, REPT^EVT^LOG and REPT^EVT^INVENTORY autonomous messages. When a TL1 session begins, REPT^DBCHG, REPT^EVT^LOG and REPT^EVT^INVENTORY messages are inhibited by default. To resume messages see ALW-MSG-BROADCAST. Security level Level 1 Input syntax
INH-MSG-BROADCAST:[TID]::CTAG;
Turn the autonomous display of REPT^EVT^LOG and REPT^EVT^INVENTORY events to off for network element BOSTON:
INH-MSG-BROADCAST:BOSTON::CTAG12;
INH-UPGRD
The Inhibit Upgrade command is entered on a network element, with parameters specifying the slot for which you want to inhibit the upgrade. Security level Level 4 Input syntax for SP
INH-UPGRD:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-123 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Slot number of the card to inhibit the upgrade Correlation tag
Example input
INIT-COLD
The Initialize Cold command instructs a network element to initialize its circuit packs. A cold initialization is equivalent to a power-up and can affect traffic. You can use the network processor as the target identifier to initialize the network processor. The date and time must be reset on the network element and network processor after a system restart. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
INIT-COLD:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-124 Syntax definition Field TID Purpose Target identifier Note: You must use the network processor as the target identifier to initialize the NP. AID CTAG Access identifier. The circuit pack to initialize. See Table 3-179. Correlation tag
Example input
INIT-OM-ETH
Use the Initialize Operational Measurements Ethernet command to clear Ethernet operational measurements for an Ethernet facility of a 2x100BT-P2P, 8x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, 8x100BT MS DSM, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P circuit pack. Note: Clearing Ethernet operational measurements for an Ethernet facility also clears the interface operational measurements for the facility. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-OM-ETH:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-125 Syntax definition Field TID AID Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to clear.
Table 3-126 AID descriptions AID type ETH AID Command-specific values Purpose ETH-slot#-port# ETH-slot#-ALL ETH-ALL Identify the Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2x100BT-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P Identify the Ethernet facility on the MS DSM where slot# = 3 to 6; port# = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4
ETH-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport
Example input
Clear Ethernet operational measurements for the Ethernet facility in port 1 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA:
INIT-OM-ETH:OTTAWA:ETH-7-1:CTAG01;
INIT-OM-IF
Use the Initialize Operational Measurements Interface command to clear Interface operational measurements for an Ethernet or WAN facility on a 2x100BT-P2P, 8x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, 8x100BT MS DSM, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P circuit pack. Interface operational measurements for a Fibre Channel facility on a 2xGigE/FC-P2P or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack. Note: Clearing interface operational measurements for an Ethernet port also clears the Ethernet operational measurements for the port. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-OM-IF:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-127 Syntax definition Field TID AID Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to clear.
3-128 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-128 AID descriptions AID type ETH AID Command-specific values Purpose ETH-slot#-port# ETH-slot#-ALL ETH-ALL Identify the Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2x100BT-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P Identify the Ethernet facility on the MS DSM where slot# = 3 to 6; port# = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 Identify the WAN port on the MS DSM where slot# = 3 to 6; port# = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 Identify the FC facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 Identify the WAN facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2x100BT-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P
ETH-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport
WAN-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport
FC AID
WAN AID
Example input
Clear interface operational measurements for WAN facility 2 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 9 of network element OTTAWA:
INIT-OM-IF:OTTAWA:WAN-9-2:CTAG01;
INIT-REG-ALL
The Initialize Registers All command instructs a network element to clear the performance monitoring data registers for all facilities. To initialize registers for individual facilities use the INIT-REG-<FACTYPE> commands. The AID for this command is always ALL. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval.You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the PM registers for all facilities and parameters for the current 15-minute accumulation period will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-ALL:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN],[DIRN], [TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-130 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-129 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
Table 3-130 AID descriptions AID type ALL Command-specific Purpose values ALL All facilities: EC-1, ETH, FC, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-24c, STS-48c, WAN, DS1, DS3
Table 3-131 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN Possible values null ALL null 0 null NEND FEND ALL Description Default: equivalent to ALL All applicable MONTYPEs Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-131 Table 3-131 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter DIRN Possible values null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. MONTM null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1-32 ALL Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals Description Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
TMPER
Grouping and ranges If MONDAT and MONTM are used, INDEX cannot be used. allowed Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday).
Initialize all 15-minute and 1-day registers on the network element, specifying MONDAT and MONTM:
INIT-REG-ALL:NEWYORK:ALL:CTAG23::,,,,15-MIN&1-DAY,ALL,ALL;
INIT-REG-EC1
The Initialize Register EC-1 command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for an EC-1 facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-EC1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN],[DIRN], [TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-134 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-132 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
Table 3-133 AID descriptions AID type EC1 Command-specific values EC1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-ALL EC1-ALL ALL Purpose Identify EC-1 facilities, where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-135 Table 3-134 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE Possible values null CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL FCL ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds - Line Unavailable Second - Line Failure Count - Line All applicable MONTYPEs
DIRN
TMPER
3-136 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-134 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTM Possible values null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals
Grouping and ranges If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used. allowed Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data for near-end receive line coding violations for EC-1 slot 3 port 6, for all intervals, all MONDAT and MONTM (that is, all current and historical information):
INIT-REG-EC1:SEATTLE:EC1-3-6:CTAG12::CVL,,NEND,RCV, ALL,ALL,ALL;
Initialize the PM data for all monitored parameters for EC-1 slot 3 port 6, for all intervals, specifying all intervals:
INIT-REG-EC1:NEWYORK:EC1-3-6:CTAG12::,,,,ALL,,,ALL;
INIT-REG-ETH
The Initialize Register Ethernet command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for an Ethernet facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-ETH:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN],[DIRN], [TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-138 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-135 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
Table 3-136 AID descriptions AID type ETH Command-specific values ETH-slot#-port# ETH-slot#-ALL ETH-ALL Purpose Identify Ethernet facilities, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port # = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P slot#= 3 to 6 port# = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to 10 Hport# = 1 to 4
ETH-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot#-Hport#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-139 Table 3-137 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE Possible values null ES SES UAS INFRAMES INFRAMESERR OUTFRAMES OUTFRAMEDISC INFRAMESDISC FRTOOLONGS FRTOOSHORTS INMACCONTROLFR ALL Grouping allowed null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Description Default: equivalent to ALL Errored Seconds Severely Errored Seconds Unavailable Seconds In Frames In Frames Errored Out Frames Out Frames Discarded In Frames Discarded Oversized Ethernet frames Undersized Ethernet frames MAC Control frames All applicable MONTYPEs Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
MONVAL LOCN
DIRN
TMPER
3-140 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-137 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTM Possible values null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals
Grouping and ranges If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used. allowed Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data for near-end receive errored seconds for the Ethernet facility in slot 3 port 6, for all intervals, all MONDAT and MONTM (that is, all current and historical information):
INIT-REG-ETH:SEATTLE:ETH-3-6:CTAG12::ES,,NEND,RCV, ALL,ALL,ALL;
Initialize the PM data for all monitored parameters for the Ethernet facility in slot 3 port 6, for all intervals, specifying all intervals:
INIT-REG-ETH:NEWYORK:ETH-3-6:CTAG12::,,,,ALL,,,ALL;
INIT-REG-FC
The Initialize Register Fibre Channel command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for a Fibre Channel facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-FC:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN],[DIRN], [TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-142 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-138 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
Table 3-139 AID descriptions AID type FC Command-specific values Purpose FC-slot#-port# FC-slot#-ALL FC-ALL Identify Fibre Channel facilities, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-143 Table 3-140 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTYPE null ES SES UAS INFRAMES OUTFRAMES OUTFRAMEDISC INFRAMESDISC CMP CMPMX ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Description Default: equivalent to ALL Errored Seconds Severely Errored Seconds Unavailable Seconds In Frames Out Frames Out Frames Discarded In Frames Discarded Compression Efficiency Maximum Compression efficiency All applicable MONTYPEs Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
DIRN
TMPER
3-144 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-140 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTM null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data for near-end receive errored seconds for the Fibre Channel facility in slot 3 port 1, for all intervals, all MONDAT and MONTM (that is, all current and historical information):
INIT-REG-FC:SEATTLE:FC-3-1:CTAG12::ES,,NEND,RCV,ALL,ALL,ALL;
Initialize the PM data for all monitored parameters for the Fibre Channel facility in slot 3 port 1, for all intervals, specifying all intervals:
INIT-REG-FC:NEWYORK:FC-3-1:CTAG12::,,,,ALL,,,ALL;
Initialize all current 15-minute registers for all Fibre Channel facilities:
INIT-REG-FC:WASHINGTON:ALL:CTAG12;
INIT-REG-OC12
The Initialize Register OC-12 command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for an OC-12 facility. Performance Monitoring (PM) data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN], [DIRN],[TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-146 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-141 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Table 3-142 AID parameters AID type OC12 AID type Command-specific values Purpose OC12-slot#-port# OC12-slot#-ALL OC12-ALL ALL Identify the OC-12 facilities where slot# = 3 to12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to10 for OC-12x4 STS port# =1 for OC-12 port# =1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
MS-DSM AID
OC12-slot-1-%HLINK-OC12 Identify the MS DSM OC-12 facility -Hslot-Hport where slot = 1 or 2 Hport = 1 to 4 Hslot = 3 to 10
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-147 Table 3-143 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTYPE null CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL FCL PSCW PSCP PSD ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds - Line Unavailable Second - Line Failure Count - Line Protection switch count - Working line Protection switch count - Protection line Protection switch duration All applicable MONTYPEs
DIRN
TMPER
3-148 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-143 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTM null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data for near-end receive line coding violations for OC-12 slot 10, for all intervals, all MONDAT and MONTM (that is, all current and historical information):
INIT-REG-OC12:SEATTLE:OC12-10:CTAG12::CVL,,NEND,RCV, ALL,ALL,ALL;
Initialize the PM data for all monitored parameters for OC-12 slot 10, for all intervals, specifying all intervals:
INIT-REG-OC12:NEWYORK:OC12-10:CTAG12::,,,,ALL,,,ALL;
INIT-REG-OC192
The Initialize Register OC-192 command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for an OC-192 facility. Performance Monitoring (PM) data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN], [DIRN],[TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-150 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-144 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Table 3-145 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# OC192-ALL ALL Purpose Identifies the OC-192 slot slot# =11, 12 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of beginning the requested PM period The time of beginning the requested PM period The interval numbers to be retrieved
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-151 Table 3-146 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTYPE null CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL FCL PSCW PSCP PSD OPR ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds - Line Unavailable Seconds - Line Failure Count - Line Protection switch count - Working line Protection switch count - Protection line Protection switch duration Optical Power Receive Optical Power Receive, normalized All monitored type Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
DIRN
TMPER
3-152 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-146 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTM null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1-32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data for near-end receive line coding violations for OC-192 slot 11, for all intervals, all MONDAT and MONTM (that is, all current and historical information):
INIT-REG-OC192:SEATTLE:OC192-11:CTAG12::CVL,,NEND,RCV, ALL,ALL,ALL;
Initialize the PM data for all monitored parameters for OC-192 slot 11, for all intervals, specifying all intervals:
INIT-REG-OC192:NEWYORK:OC192-11:CTAG12::,,,,ALL,,,ALL;
INIT-REG-OC3
The Initialize Register OC-3 command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for an OC-3 facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN],[DIRN], [TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-154 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-147 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Table 3-148 AID descriptions AID type OC3 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port# OC3-slot#-ALL OC3-ALL ALL Purpose Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-155 Table 3-149 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE Possible values null CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL FCL PSCW PSCP PSD ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds - Line Unavailable Second - Line Failure Count - Line Protection switch count - Working line Protection switch count - Protection line Protection switch duration All applicable MONTYPEs
DIRN
TMPER
3-156 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-149 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTM Possible values null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals
Grouping and ranges If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used. allowed Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data for near-end receive line coding violations for OC-3x4 slot 10 port 2, for all intervals, all MONDAT and MONTM (that is, all current and historical information):
INIT-REG-OC3:SEATTLE:OC3-10-2:CTAG12::CVL,,NEND,RCV, ALL,ALL,ALL;
Initialize the PM data for all monitored parameters for OC-3x4 slot 10 port 2, for all intervals, specifying all intervals:
INIT-REG-OC3:NEWYORK:OC3-10-2:CTAG12::,,,,ALL,,,ALL;
INIT-REG-OC48
The Initialize Register OC-48 command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for an OC-48 facility. Performance Monitoring (PM) data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN], [DIRN],[TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-158 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-150 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Table 3-151 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values Purpose OC48-slot# OC48-ALL ALL Identifies the OC-48 slot slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS, 11 or 12 for OC-48 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of beginning the requested PM period The time of beginning the requested PM period The interval numbers to be retrieved
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-159 Table 3-152 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTYPE null CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL FCL PSCW PSCP PSD OPR ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds - Line Unavailable Seconds - Line Failure Count - Line Protection switch count - Working line Protection switch count - Protection line Protection switch duration Optical Power Receive All applicable MONTYPEs
DIRN
TMPER
3-160 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-152 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTM null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1-32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data for near-end receive line coding violations for OC-48 slot 11, for all intervals, all MONDAT and MONTM (that is, all current and historical information):
INIT-REG-OC48:SEATTLE:OC48-11:CTAG12::CVL,,NEND,RCV, ALL,ALL,ALL;
Initialize the PM data for all monitored parameters for OC-48 slot 11, for all intervals, specifying all intervals:
INIT-REG-OC48:NEWYORK:OC48-11:CTAG12::,,,,ALL,,,ALL;
INIT-REG-STS1
The Initialize Register STS-1 command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for the STS-1 facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-STS1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN], [DIRN],[TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-162 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-153 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
Table 3-154 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTYPE null CVP ESP SESP ALSP UASP FCP ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path AIS/LOP Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Failure Count - Path All applicable MONTYPEs Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-163 Table 3-154 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values DIRN null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. MONTM null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used. Description Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
TMPER
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday).
3-164 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-155 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 facilities on the OC-3 or OC-3x4 interfaces where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3, 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 facilities on the DSM interfaces where slot# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify all STS-1 facilities on the DSM interfaces where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-1 facilities on the DSM interfaces where slot# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify all STS-1 facilities on the DSM interfaces where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-1 facilities on the OC-192 interfaces slot# = 11 or 12, sts# = 1 to 192 Identify the STS-1 facilities on the EC-1x3, EC-1x12, or DS3/EC-1x12 interfaces where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 or DS3/EC-1x12 All applicable STS-1 path facilities
OC3-slot-1-ALL-%HLINKOC3-hslot#-hport#
OC12-slot-1-sts#-%HLINKOC12-hslot#-hport#
OC12-slot-1-ALL-%HLINKOC12-hslot#-hport#
Initialize the PM data at NEWYORK on OC-3x4 in slot 3 port 1 sts 2, for path errored seconds (ESP) for the current 15-minute bin:
INIT-REG-STS1:NEWYORK:OC3-3-1-2:CTAG12::ESP;
Initialize the PM data at SEATTLE on all facilities for path failure count (FCP), at the near-end receive direction only for the current 1-day bin:
INIT-REG-STS1:SEATTLE:ALL:CTAG12::FCP,,NEND,RCV,1-DAY;
INIT-REG-STS12C
The Initialize Register STS-12c command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for the STS-12c facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-STS12C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN], [DIRN],[TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-166 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-156 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Table 3-157 AID descriptions AID type STS-12c Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port#-sts# OC12-slot#-port#-ALL OC12-slot#-ALL OC12-ALL Purpose Identify the STS-12c facilities, where slot# = 3 to12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to10 for OC-12x4 STS port# =1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 Identify the STS-12c facilities on the DSM interfaces where slot# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 1 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify all STS-12c facilities on the DSM interfaces where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 1 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 All applicable STS-12c path facilities Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The STS-12c path facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
OC12-slot#-sts#-%HLINKOC12-hslot#-hport#
OC12-slot-#-ALL-%HLINKOC12-hslot#-hport#
ALL
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-167 Table 3-158 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE Possible values null CVP ESP SESP ALSP UASP FCP ALL Grouping allowed null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path AIS/LOP Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Failure Count - Path All applicable MONTYPEs Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
MONVAL LOCN
DIRN
TMPER
3-168 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-158 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTM Possible values null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data at NEWYORK on OC-12 in slot 3 sts 1, for path errored seconds (ESP) for the current 15-minute bin:
INIT-REG-STS3C:NEWYORK:OC12-3-1:CTAG12::ESP;
Initialize the PM data at WASHINGTON on all OC-12 slots for STS-12c path severely errored seconds (SESP), specifying MONDAT and MONTM for 15-minute bins:
INIT-REG-STS3C:WASHINGTON:OC12-ALL:CTAG12:SESP,,,,,12-25 ,09-00;
Initialize the PM data at SEATTLE on all OC-12 and OC-48 facilities for STS-12c path failure count (FCP), at the near-end receive direction only for the current 1-day bin:
INIT-REG-STS12C:SEATTLE:ALL:CTAG12::FCP,,NEND,RCV,1-DAY;
INIT-REG-STS24C
The Initialize Register STS-24c command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for the STS-24c facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-STS24C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN], [DIRN],[TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-170 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-159 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Table 3-160 AID descriptions AID type STS-24c AID Command-specific values OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL Purpose Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# =1, 25 All slots with OC-192 cards Identify the STS-24c facility where slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 All slots with OC-48 STS cards All applicable STS-24c facilities Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The STS-24c path facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
ALL
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-171 Table 3-161 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTYPE null CVP ESP SESP ALSP UASP FCP ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path AIS/LOP Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Failure Count - Path All applicable MONTYPEs Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
DIRN
TMPER
3-172 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-161 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values MONTM null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data at NEWYORK on OC-48 in slot 3 sts 1, for path errored seconds (ESP) for the current 15-minute bin:
INIT-REG-STS24C:NEWYORK:OC48-3-1:CTAG12::ESP;
Initialize the PM data at WASHINGTON on all OC-48 slots for STS-24c path severely errored seconds (SESP), specifying MONDAT and MONTM for 15-minute bins:
INIT-REG-STS24C:WASHINGTON:OC48-ALL:CTAG12:SESP,,,,,12-25 ,09-00;
Initialize the PM data at SEATTLE on all OC-48 facilities for STS-24c path failure count (FCP), at the near-end receive direction only for the current 1-day bin:
INIT-REG-STS24C:SEATTLE:ALL:CTAG12::FCP,,NEND,RCV,1-DAY;
INIT-REG-STS3C
The Initialize Register STS-3c command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for the STS-3c facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-STS3C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN], [DIRN],[TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
3-174 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-162 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-175 Table 3-163 AID Description AID type STS-3c AID Command-specific values Purpose OC3-slot#-port#-sts# OC3-slot#-port#-ALL OC3-slot#-ALL OC3-ALL OC12-slot#-port#-sts# OC12-slot#-port#-ALL OC12-slot#-ALL OC-12-ALL Identify the STS-3c facility slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# =1 Identify the STS-3c facility slot# = 3 to12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to10 for OC-12x4 STS port# =1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10 Identify the STS-3c facility slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 sts# = 1, 4, 7, .., 46 Identify the STS-3c facility slot# =11 to 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, ..., 190 All applicable STS-3c path facilities Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC48-ALL OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL ALL DSM STS-3c AID OC3-slot-1-sts#-%HLINKOC3-Hslot#-Hport# OC3-slot-1-ALL-%HLINKOC3-Hslot#-Hport# OC12-slot-1-sts-%HLINKOC12-Hslot#-Hport# OC12-slot-1-ALL-%HLINKOC12-Hslot#-Hport# Example input
Identify the STS-3c facility where slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10 hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
Initialize the PM data at NEWYORK on OC-3x4 in slot 3 port 2 sts 1, for path errored seconds (ESP) for the current 15-minute bin:
INIT-REG-STS3C:NEWYORK:OC3-3-2-1:CTAG12::ESP;
Initialize the PM data at WASHINGTON on all OC-3x4 slots for STS-3c path severely errored seconds (SESP), specifying MONDAT and MONTM for 15-minute bins:
INIT-REG-STS3C:WASHINGTON:OC3-ALL:CTAG12:SESP,,,,,12-25,09-00;
Initialize the PM data at SEATTLE on all facilities for STS-3c path failure count (FCP), at the near-end receive direction only for the current 1-day bin:
INIT-REG-STS3C:SEATTLE:ALL:CTAG12::FCP,,NEND,RCV,1-DAY; TL1 ReferencePart 2 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
INIT-REG-STS48C
The Initialize Register STS-48c command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for the STS-48c facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-STS48C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN], [DIRN],[TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-177 Table 3-164 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Table 3-165 AID descriptions AID type STS-48c AID Command-specific values OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 11, 12 sts# =1, 49, 97, 145 All slots with OC-192 cards Identify the STS-48c facility where slot# = 3 to 12, sts# =1 All slots with OC-48 STS cards All applicable STS-48c facilities Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The STS-48c path facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
3-178 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-166 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE Possible values null CVP ESP SESP ALSP UASP FCP ALL Grouping allowed null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path AIS/LOP Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Failure Count - Path All applicable MONTYPEs Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
MONVAL LOCN
DIRN
TMPER
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-179 Table 3-166 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTM Possible values null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data at NEWYORK on OC-48 in slot 3 sts 1, for path errored seconds (ESP) for the current 15-minute bin:
INIT-REG-STS48C:NEWYORK:OC48-3-1:CTAG12::ESP;
Initialize the PM data at WASHINGTON on all OC-48 slots for STS-48c path severely errored seconds (SESP), specifying MONDAT and MONTM for 15-minute bins:
INIT-REG-STS48C:WASHINGTON:OC48-ALL:CTAG12:SESP,,,,,12-25 ,09-00;
Initialize the PM data at SEATTLE on all OC-48 facilities for STS-48c path failure count (FCP), at the near-end receive direction only for the current 1-day bin:
INIT-REG-STS48C:SEATTLE:ALL:CTAG12::FCP,,NEND,RCV,1-DAY;
INIT-REG-T1
The Initialize Registers T1 command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for the DS1 facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN],[DIRN], [TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-181 Table 3-167 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Table 3-168 AID descriptions AID type T1 AID Command-specific values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-ALL DS1-ALL DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL Purpose Identify the DS1s where slot# = 4 to 10 port# = 1 to 12 Identify DS1s on DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DSM port# = 1 to 84 HLINE= OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 All DS1 ports on DSM HLINE= OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 All DS1 facilities Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# DS1-1-ALL-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
ALL
3-182 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-169 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE Possible values null CVL ESL SESL CVP ESP SESP SEFSP SASP CSSP UASP FCP ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds- Line Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Path SEF / AIS Seconds - Path Controlled slip seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Failure Count - Path All applicable MONTYPEs
DIRN
TMPER
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-183 Table 3-169 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTM Possible values null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data for near-end receive line coding violations for DS1 slot 4 port 7, for all intervals, specifying ALL MONDAT and ALL MONTM (that is, all current and historical bins):
INIT-REG-T1:NEWYORK:DS1-4-7:CTAG12::CVL,,NEND,RCV,ALL,ALL,ALL;
Initialize the PM data for all monitored parameters for DS1 slot 4 port 7, for all intervals, specifying all time periods:
INIT-REG-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-4-7:CTAG12::,,,,15-MIN&1-DAY&1-UNT,,,A LL;
INIT-REG-T3
The Initialize Registers T3 command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for the DS3 facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-T3:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN],[DIRN], [TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-185 Table 3-170 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Table 3-171 AID descriptions AID type T3 AID Command-specific values DS3-slot#-port# DS3-slot#-ALL DS3-ALL MS DSM T3 AID DS3-1-port#-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# Purpose slot#=3 to 10 port#=1 to 4 slot#=3 to 10 All DS3 ports All DS3 ports port# = 1 to 6 HLINE=OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 All DS3 ports on MS DSM HLINE=OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
DS3-1-ALL-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
3-186 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-172 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE Possible values null CVL ESL SESL CVP ESP SESP SASP UASP FCP ALL Grouping allowed MONVAL LOCN null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals Description Default: equivalent to ALL Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds- Line Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path SEF / AIS Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Failure Count - Path All applicable MONTYPEs
DIRN
TMPER
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-187 Table 3-172 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTM Possible values null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data at NEWYORK on DS3 in slot 3 port 2 for path coding violations (CVP) for the current 15-minute bin:
INIT-REG-T3:NEWYORK:DS3-3-2:CTAG12::CVP;
Initialize the PM data at WASHINGTON on all DS3 slots for path unavailable seconds (UASP), specifying MONDAT and MONTM:
INIT-REG-T3:WASHINGTON:DS3-ALL:CTAG12::UASP,,,,,12-25,09-00;
Initialize the PM data at SEATTLE on all DS3 facilities for path severely errored seconds (SESP), at the near-end receive direction only for the current 1-day bin:
INIT-REG-T3:SEATTLE:ALL:CTAG12::SESP,,NEND,RCV,1-DAY;
INIT-REG-WAN
The Initialize Register WAN command instructs a network element to initialize performance monitoring data for a WAN facility. PM data is kept in separate monitored parameter registers or bins for each passed interval. You can specify either the starting time of the periods of interest using <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, or you can directly specify the interval by using <INDEX>. If you specify <MONDAT>, <MONTM>, or both, you cannot specify <INDEX>. Current intervals are indicated by INDEX=0, and older periods have higher numbers. If you specify <INDEX>, you cannot specify <MONDAT> or <MONTM>. Note: The accumulation intervals that are stored are as follows: the current 15-minute and 32 previous 15-minute intervals, the current day and previous day, and an untimed interval. If all optional parameters are left blank, all of the current 15-min PM registers for all parameters for the corresponding facility will be cleared at once. Several parameters can be grouped. To group parameters, use the ampersand (&) as the separator. To use a range of parameters, use two ampersands (&&) between the parameters. For example, to use a range of INDEX intervals from 5 to 12, enter 5&&12 as the INDEX parameter. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
INIT-REG-WAN:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[MONTYPE],[MONVAL],[LOCN],[DIRN], [TMPER],[MONDAT],[MONTM],[INDEX];
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-189 Table 3-173 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG MONTYPE MONVAL LOCN DIRN TMPER MONDAT MONTM INDEX Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to which the command applies. Correlation tag The type of monitored parameter for which a value is requested The value the registers should be initialized to The location where the monitored parameter originates, and refers to the entity identified by the AID The direction which the monitored parameter applies, and is relative to the entity identified by the AID The accumulation time period for the PM information The date of the beginning of the requested PM period The beginning time of day of the requested PM period The interval numbers to be accessed
Table 3-174 AID descriptions AID type WAN Command-specific values WAN-slot#-port# WAN-slot#-ALL WAN-ALL Purpose Identify WAN facilities, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P Identify the WAN port where slot = 3 to 6 port = 1 to 8 HLINE = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to 10 Hport# = 1 to 4 depending on the circuit pack.
WAN-slot-port-%HLINK-HlineHslot-Hport
3-190 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-175 Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTYPE Possible values null ES SES UAS INFRAMES INFRAMESERR OUTFRAMES LDS LSDS LUAS UTL UTLMX ALL Grouping allowed null 0 null NEND FEND ALL null TRMT RCV ALL null 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT ALL Grouping allowed MONDAT null ALL MONTH-DAY Grouping allowed Default: Current date All dates available MONTH= 1 to 12, DAY= 1 to 31 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER = 1-UNT, MONDAT is not applicable. Description Default: equivalent to ALL Errored Seconds Severely Errored Seconds Unavailable Seconds In Frames In Frames Errored Out Frames LCAS degraded seconds LCAS severely degraded seconds LCAS unavailable seconds Link utilization Maximum link Utilization All applicable MONTYPEs LDS, LSDS, LUAS are applicable only for 4x100FX and 8x100BT-P2P circuit packs. Default: equivalent to 0 Reset registers to zero Default: All applicable locations Near end Far end All applicable locations Default: All applicable directions Transmit direction only Receive direction only All applicable directions Default: equivalent to 15-MIN 15-minute interval 1-day interval Untimed interval All intervals
MONVAL LOCN
DIRN
TMPER
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-191 Table 3-175 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter MONTM Possible values null ALL HOUR-MINUTE Grouping allowed Description Default: Current 15-MIN All available times HOUR= 00 to 23, MINUTE= 00, 15, 30, 45 MONDAT and MONTM can be used as a pair. Note 1: If INDEX is used, MONDAT and MONTM cannot be used. Note 2: If TMPER=1-UNT or TMPER=1-DAY, MONTM is not applicable. INDEX null 0 1 to 32 ALL Grouping and ranges allowed Default: equivalent to 0 Current interval Previous intervals (see Note) All available intervals If MONDAT or MONTM is used, INDEX cannot be used.
Note: For TMPER=15-MIN, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval, INDEX=2 is the interval before that. For TMPER=1-DAY, INDEX=1 is the most recently completed day interval (yesterday). Example input
Initialize the PM data for near-end receive errored seconds for the WAN facility in slot 3 port 6, for all intervals, all MONDAT and MONTM (that is, all current and historical information):
INIT-REG-WAN:SEATTLE:WAN-3-6:CTAG12::ES,,NEND,RCV, ALL,ALL,ALL;
Initialize the PM data for all monitored parameters for the WAN facility in slot 3 port 6, for all intervals, specifying all intervals:
INIT-REG-WAN:NEWYORK:WAN-3-6:CTAG12::,,,,ALL,,,ALL;
INIT-UPGRD-EQPT
The Initiate Upgrade - Equipment command is used to initiate an automatic line rate upgrade which converts all the provisioning data of an OC-3 to that of an OC-12 OC-12 to that of an OC-48 OC-48 to that of an OC-192 Security level Level 3 Input syntax
INIT-UPGRD-EQPT:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-176 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Equipment to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-177 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 AID OC-48 AID OC-48 STS AID OC-192 AID Command-specific values Purpose OC12-slot# OC48-slot# OC48-slot# OC192-slot# Identify the OC-12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 Identify the OC-48 equipment where slot# = 11, 12 Identify the OC-48 equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 Identify the OC-192 equipment where slot# = 11, 12
Example input
INIT-WARM
The Initialize Warm command instructs a network element to initialize its circuit packs. A warm initialization does not affect traffic. The date and time must be reset after a system restart. Note: If the INIT-WARM command is issued against the OC-3x4 circuit pack, an SDCC link failure alarm will be briefly raised and then cleared. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
INIT-WARM:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-178 Syntax definition Field TID Purpose Target identifier Note: You must use the network processor as the target identifier to initialize the NP. AID CTAG Access identifier. The circuit pack to initialize. Correlation tag
Table 3-179 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Purpose values Identify the DS1 where slot# =3 to 10 Identify the DS3 where slot# =3 to 10 Identify the DS3VTx12 where slot# =3 to 10 Identify the DS3/EC-1x12 where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-3 or OC-3x4 where slot# =3 to 10
3-194 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-179 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Purpose values Identify the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12, 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-48 or OC-48 STS where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48, 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS Identify the OC-192 where slot# = 11 or 12 Identify the EC-1 where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the VTX48, VTX40/10 or STX-192 where slot# =13 or 14 Identify the ILAN Identify the 4x100BT where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 4x100FX-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 8x100BT-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for the double slot circuit packs and slot# =3 to 10 for the single slot 2xGigE circuit packs. Identify the 4x100FX where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2x100BT-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE 2.5G circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Protection switch controller Shelf processor Network processor Note: You must use the network processor as the target identifier to initialize the NP.
Equipment OC12-slot#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-195 Table 3-179 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Purpose values
Equipment DS1TM-slot#Identify a single DSM DS1 termination module, %HLINK-oc3-hslot# where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, -hport# hport# = 1 to 4 AGGOC3-slot%HLINK-OC3Hslot-Hport# Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
AGGOC3OC12Identify a single MS DSM termination module, slot-%HLINK-OC12- where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, Hslot-Hport# hport# = 1 to 4 PECN-slot#%HLINK-HlineHslot#-Hport# PFOST-slot#%HLINK-HlineHslot#-Hport# Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4, HLINE = OC3 or OC12 Identify the pluggable equipment where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4, HLINE = OC3 or OC12
Example input
INVK-INSTALL
The Invoke Installation command initiates the installation of software to the shelf processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
INVK-INSTALL:[TID]::CTAG; Table 3-180 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Purpose Target identifier of the network element that contains the shelf processor Correlation tag
Example input
Initiate the installation of the software to the shelf processor on network element OTTAWA:
INVK-INSTALL:OTTAWA::CTAG45;
INVK-RINGMAP
Use the Invoke Ring Map command to apply the ring map. This command is supported on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
INVK-RINGMAP:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-181 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-182 AID descriptions AID type Ring name Command-specific values Purpose Purpose Target identifier Ring name Correlation tag
Example input
INVK-UPGRD
When issued from the network element user interface, the Invoke Upgrade command causes the new shelf processor and transport loads to be executed. The new transport load runs on each transport card. When issued from the network processor user interface, the Invoke Upgrade command causes the new network processor load to be executed. Security level Level 3 Input syntax for NP
INVK-UPGRD:[TID]::CTAG;
LOAD-FPGA
Use the Load Field Programmable Gate Array command to upgrade the FPGA load of a Packet Edge, 2x100BT-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P circuit pack. Note: After the upgrade, you must cold restart the circuit pack for the new FPGA load to be used. See the description of the INIT-COLD command on page 3-125 for information about performing a cold restart. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
LOAD-FPGA:[TID]:AID:CTAG::RNAME ; Table 3-185 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG RNAME Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Remote node name where FPGA load file resides. 1 to 40 alphanumeric characters.
Table 3-186 AID descriptions AID IPT100 1GE Possible values Description IPT100-slot# 1GE-slot# Upgrade the FPGA load of the 4x100BT where slot# = 3 to 10 Upgrade the FPGA load of the 2xGigE where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for double slot circuit pack and slot#= 3 to 10 for single slot 2xGigE circuit packs. Upgrade the FPGA load of the 4x100FX where slot# = 3 to 10
100FX
100FX-slot#
100BTFOS 100BTFOS-slot# Upgrade the FPGA load of the 2x100BT-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10 1GFOS 1GFOS-slot# Upgrade the FPGA load of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P where slot# = 3 to 10
3-200 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-186 (continued) AID descriptions AID 1GE25G AID MS DSM AID Possible values Description 1GE25G-slot# AGGOC3-slot%HLINK-OC3Hslot#-Hport# AGGOC3OC12slot-%HLINKHLINE-Hslot#Hport# PFOST-slot%HLINK-HlineHslot#-Hport# Upgrade the FPGA load of the 2xGigE 2.5G circuit pack where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4, HLINE = OC3 or OC12 Identify the pluggable equipment where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4, HLINE = OC3 or OC12
Example input
Upgrade the FPGA load of the 4x100BT in slot 5 of network element NEWYORK:
LOAD-FPGA:NEWYORK:IPT100-5:CTAG 12::MASTERNODE58;
LOAD-INSTALL
The Load Installation command downloads the software load to install on the shelf processor from a specified node to the program store bank of the shelf processor. The system uses a different store bank from the one currently running. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
LOAD-INSTALL:[TID]::CTAG::RNAME; Table 3-187 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG RNAME Purpose Target identifier of the network element that contains the shelf processor Correlation tag Target identifier of the node (local/remote network element, network processor, or operation controller) that contains the load files and provisioning data to install on the shelf processor
Table 3-188 Parameter description Parameter RNAME Possible values PC Description Locally attached PC
string of 1 to 40 alphanumeric Remote node name where target characters release files reside. Example input
Download the software load from the network element MONTREAL to the shelf processor of network element OTTAWA:
LOAD-INSTALL:OTTAWA::CTAG45::MONTREAL;
LOAD-REPLACE
The Load Replace command installs the specified software load into the file system, without upgrading to it. This makes the load available for upgrades by the local network processor or other connected network elements or network processors. This command is only available on the network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
LOAD-REPLACE:[TID]::CTAG::[RNAME],[RELNO]:[ALRMS=Domain] [,INHIBIT=Domain]; Table 3-189 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG RNAME RELNO ALRMS=Domain INHIBIT=Domain Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Name of the node or OPC where the load files reside Release number to install on network processor. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Check alarms. See Parameter descriptions table for details. Check inhibit
Table 3-190 Parameter descriptions Parameter RNAME Description The name of the node from which the new loads are retrieved. The node can be of different types: OC3NP: RNAME = the remote TID (7-20 characters) OPC: RNAME = the name of the remote OPC ASCII string identifying the release number to upgrade to If Y, proceed only if there are no alarms If N, proceed regardless of the alarm status If Y, proceed only if no slots have been inhibited If N, proceed regardless of inhibit status
Example input
Install load REL0400A.DM from OPC MONTREAL onto network processor OTTAWANP and proceed only if there are no alarms:
LOAD-REPLACE:OTTAWANP::CTAG1::MONTREAL,REL0400A.DM:ALRMS=Y; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
LOAD-RINGMAP
Use the Load Ring Map command to load map information to all managed shelf processors. By default, the ring map is loaded from the local network processor. You can also load the ring map from a remote network processor. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
LOAD-RINGMAP:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[REMOTE-NAME][,DIRECTORY]; Table 3-191 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG REMOTE-NAME DIRECTORY Table 3-192 AID descriptions AID type Ring name Command-specific values Purpose Purpose Target identifier Ring name Correlation tag Remote shelf processor or network processor Path that contains the ring map
Table 3-193 Parameter descriptions Parameter REMOTE-NAME DIRECTORY Possible values Description
An alphanumeric string between 1 Target identifier of the and 20 characters remote network processor An alphanumeric string between 1 Path on the remote shelf and 96 characters processor or network processor that contains the ring map
Example input
Load the ring map information to all nodes in the ring OTTAWA_RING:
LOAD-RINGMAP:NPFGXOTT:OTTAWA_RING:CTAG;
LOAD-TL1SCRPT-NE
The Load TL1 Script Network Element command is used to download a TL1 script file from a remote destination with a TID or IP address, and then temporarily store it on the NP. While this command is running, a TL1 Script file Load in Progress alarm becomes active. This alarm remains active until you run the CMMT-TL1SCRPT-NE command (to commit the TL1 commands in this file to the target network element), or the CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE command (to cancel this operation). This command is not successful if one of the following occurs there is an unsuccessful download of the TL1 script file from the remote location the file validation fails If this command is not successful, a TL1 Script file Load Failed alarm becomes active. To clear this alarm (and cancel this operation), you must run the CANC-TL1SCRPT-NE command. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
LOAD-TL1SCRPT-NE:[TID]::CTAG::[userid],[passwd]:TRGTID=Domain ,DESTTYPE=Domain,DESTADDR=Domain][,DIR=Domain][,CHKALM=Domain] [,CHKTID=Domain]; Table 3-194 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG userid passwd TRGTID DESTTYPE DESTADDR Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag User login ID User password Targeted TID (the SP for which the NP is required to act upon) Source of the TL1 script file TID or IP Address of the DESTTYPE (TID or IP) which is the source of the TL1 script file
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-205 Table 3-194 (continued) Syntax definition Field DIR CHKALM CHKTID Purpose Directory in which the TL1 script file is stored. Check alarm status Check TID Specifies whether the operation does or does not compare the TID from which the TL1 script file was saved with the TID of the network processor to which the TL1 script file is being stored. Table 3-195 Parameter descriptions Parameter DESTTYPE Possible values TID Description A remote Restore will be executed using ALFTAM or FTAM protocol to transfer files from the TID given in the DESTADDR parameter to a shelf processor or network processor. A remote Restore will be enacted using FTP to transfer files from the IP address given in the DESTADDR parameter to the network processor. Name of the remote location with the TL1 script file consisting of an identifier of 7 to 20 alphanumeric characters. The first character is alphabetic. The address of the remote location with the TL1 script file consisting of an identifier in the format x.x.x.x (where x=a number 0-255). A string of characters that specifies the unique directory name in which the TL1 script file is located. When storing the TL1 script file on the network processor, the name of the directory in which the TL1 script file is located must be specified in the command or the command fails. (That is, there is no default directory name.) The directory name is a string of 1 to 60 characters.
IP
DESTADDR
TID address
IP address
DIR
Directory name
3-206 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-195 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter CHKTID Possible values Y (default) N Description Perform TID check Do not check the TID To store the TL1 script file of a network processor to a network processor with a different TID, set CHKTID to N. CHKALM Y (default) The LOAD-TL1SCRPT-NE command is not allowed if there is an alarm present on the network processor. The LOAD-TL1SCRPT-NE command is allowed if there is an alarm present on the network processor receiving the command except if it is in one of the following states: upgrade in progress; load mismatch; IS rollover in progress; duplicate SID; database save and restore in progress.
Example input
Load the TL1 script file from a remote Unix station to network processor OTTAWA:
LOAD-TL1SCRPT-NE::CTAG96:::TRGTID=OTTAWA,DESTTYPE=IP, DESTADDR=47.100.3.54,DIR=/home/sam/saverest, CHKALM=Y,CHKTID=N;
LOAD-UPGRD
When issued from the network element user interface, the Load Upgrade command causes the new shelf processor and transport loads to be downloaded into the shelf processor file system. The new transport load is transferred from the shelf processor to each transport card in the network element. When issued from the network processor user interface, the Load Upgrade command causes the new shelf processor, transport, and network processor loads to be downloaded into the network processor file system. When issued from the network element user interface on a specific slot, the Load Upgrade command causes the transport loads to be downloaded into the specified card. Security level Level 3 Input syntax for NP
LOAD-UPGRD:[TID]::CTAG::RNAME,RELNO:[ALRMS=Domain];
INHIBIT Check inhibit. This parameter allows the upgrade to continue even though slots have been inhibited on the shelf. See Parameter descriptions table for details.
3-208 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-197 Parameter descriptions Parameter RNAME Description The name of the node from which the new loads are retrieved. The node can be of different types: OC3NE: RNAME = the remote TID (7-20 characters) OC3NP: RNAME = the remote TID (7-20 characters) OPC: RNAME = the name of the remote OPC For upgrade from a PC using the RS-232 port: PC: RNAME = "PC" For upgrade from the local file system: file system: RNAME = the local TID (7-20 characters) Note: OC3NE is valid only for network element upgrade. RELNO ALRMS ASCII string identifying the release number to upgrade to If Y, proceed only if there are no alarms If N, proceed regardless of the alarm status INHIBIT If Y (default), procced only if no slots have been inhibited If N, proceed regardless of inhibit status Example input
Download the new software from network element OTTAWA to network element NEWYORK regardless of the alarm status:
LOAD-UPGRD:NEWYORK::CTAG24::OTTAWA,NTNA6021:ALRMS=N;
OPR-ACO-ALL
The Operate Audible Alarm Cutoff All command instructs a network element to cut off the office audible alarm indications without changing the other alarm indications. The result of the OPR-ACO-ALL command is identical to manually pressing the ACO button on the network element circuit pack. There is no complementary release command for ACO. Security level Level 1 Input syntax
OPR-ACO-ALL:[TID]:[AID]:CTAG;
OPR-BITSOUTSW
The Operate BITS Out Switch command is used to perform manual synchronization switching between the primary and secondary timing references at a BITS output. The switch completes only if the quality of the two references is the same. The network element always chooses the best quality timing reference for its synchronization reference. Use the RTRV-BITS-OUT command to retrieve the current timing reference settings. Use the SET-BITS-OUT command to assign the primary and secondary timing references. User synchronization switches initiated using this command remain active until another BITS Out switch is activated or they are overridden by a synchronization reference failure. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-BITSOUTSW:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-200 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. BITS output ot act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-201 AID descriptions AID type BITS output Command-specific values BITSOUT-<bits> Purpose Identify the BITSOUT to switch where bits= A or B
Example input
Switch BITSOUT-A from the currently active timing source to the other timing source:
OPR-BITSOUTSW:NEWYORK:BITSOUT-A:CTAG23;
OPR-EXT-CONT
The Operate External Controls command is used to turn on one or more of the four external control relays. The network element is equipped with four relays that can be configured for normally closed or normally open operation. The contact number parameter is mandatory and grouping is allowed. The control TYPE parameter is not required, but can be used to parse the command. For example, if the command is intended to turn on lights on relay 3, but relay 3 is actually connected to sprinklers, then including the value LIGHT in the CONTTYPE field would cause the command to fail (and prevent sprinklers from being accidentally turned on). CAUTION Be careful not to turn on external controls that activate a potential danger such as sprinklers or miscellaneous controls connected to possibly hazardous systems or equipment. To turn off external control relays see the RLS-EXT-CONT command. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-EXT-CONT:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[CONTTYPE]; Table 3-202 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG CONTTYPE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. A group of values is acceptable. Correlation tag Optional parameter, the TYPE of control for which the control state is being set
3-212 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-203 AID descriptions AID TYPE Command-specific values Purpose Identify the contact number Activate all external relays. Not allowed when CONTTYPE is null. Identify multiple contacts DS1 service module or the MS DSM office audible alarms number = 1 to 4, hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# =1 to 4, HLINE = OC3 or OC12 All DS1 service module or MS DSM office audible alarms hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4, HLINE = OC3 or OC12
ALL-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
Table 3-204 Parameter descriptions Parameter CONTTYPE Possible values Description null AIRCOND ENGINE FAN GEN HEAT LIGHT MISC SPKLR Optional parameter (ALL). Not allowed when AID is ALL Air conditioning Engine Fan Generator Heat Light Miscellaneous Sprinkler
OPR-LAMP-TEST
The Operate Lamp Test command performs a lamp test on a specific DSM DS1x84 termination module on the DSM a specific aggregate circuit pack on the MS DSM all network element slots and associated DSMs/MS DSMs For a DSM DS1x84 termination module or MS DSM aggregate circuit pack, the lamp test helps identify module locations and host link misconnections. The lamp test is directed to the host OCn port and sent to the DSM or MS DSM that is fiber connected to this OCn port. Note 1: The DS1x84 termination module or MS DSM aggregate circuit pack must have a direct OAM link to the Host OCn port. Note 2: A lamp test against the active aggregate circuit pack turns on the entire shelf except the standby aggregate circuit pack. A lamp test against the standby aggregate circuit pack turns on the aggregate circuit pack only. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LAMP-TEST:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-205 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-206 AID description AID type DSM or MS DSM AID Command specific Purpose values %HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# Identify the DS1x84 TM or aggregate circuit pack where HLINE = OC3 or OC12, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Perform a lamp test on all network element slots and attached DSMs or MS DSMs. Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
ALL
Perform a lamp test on network element BOSTON and all attached DSMs/MS DSMs:
OPR-LAMP-TEST:BOSTON:ALL:CTAG12;
OPR-LPBK-EC1
The Operate Loopback EC-1 facility command instructs the equipment to set the specified EC-1 facility into loopback mode. Two types of loopbacks are provided: terminal and facility. The facility must be put in an out-of-service state before a loopback will be permitted (see the RMV-EC1 command). To release the facility loopback, use the RLS-LPBK-EC1 command. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LPBK-EC1:TID:AID:CTAG::,,,[LPBKTYPE]; Table 3-207 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LPBKTYPE Table 3-208 AID descriptions AID type EC-1 Command-specific values EC1-slot#-port# Purpose slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag Loopback type
FACILITY (default) A signal received on the copper side of the facility is looped back towards the copper. TERMINAL A signal received on the optical side of the facility is looped back towards the optics.
At the SEATTLE network element, for the port 11 facility on the slot 5 EC-1 mapper, loopback the incoming signal from the optics back on to the optics:
OPR-LPBK-EC1:SEATTLE:EC1-5-11:CTAG::,,,TERMINAL;
At the SEATTLE network element, for the port 11 facility on the slot 5 EC-1 mapper, loopback the incoming signal from the copper back on to the copper:
OPR-LPBK-EC1:SEATTLE:EC1-5-11:CTAG::,,,FACILITY;
OPR-LPBK-ETH
The Operate Loopback Ethernet command operates a facility or terminal loopback on an Ethernet facility (LAN port) of a 2x100BT-P2P, 8x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P circuit pack. The facility must be in an out-of-service management (OOS-MA) state before you can operate a loopback. See RMV-ETH on page 3-393 for information about putting an Ethernet facility in an OOS-MA state. See RLS-LPBK-ETH on page 3-366 for information about releasing a loopback. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LPBK-ETH:[TID]:AID:CTAG::,,,[LPBKTYPE]; Table 3-210 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LPBKTYPE Table 3-211 AID descriptions AID type ETH Command-specific values ETH-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 slot#= 3 to 6; port# = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot# = 3 to10 Hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Ethernet facility to put in loopback mode. Correlation tag Loopback type
ETH-slot#-port#-%HLINKHline-Hslot#-Hport#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-219 Table 3-212 Parameter descriptions Parameter LPBKTYPE Possible values FACILITY (default) TERMINAL Description The Ethernet signal received on the LAN port is sent back out. The SONET signal received on the corresponding WAN port is sent back out.
Note 1: To operate a terminal loopback, the LAN port must be in full duplex mode. See ED-ETH on page 2-227 to change the duplex mode of a LAN port. Note 2: During a terminal loopback, the LAN port sends a link pulse, even though the port is out-of-service. Also, the INFRAMES, INOCTETS, OUTFRAMES, and OUTOCTETS measurements of the LAN port increment, in relation to the number of packets received by the WAN port. Note 3: The 8x100BT-P2P on the MS DSM does not support facility loopbacks. Example input
Operate a facility loopback on LAN port 1 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA:
OPR-LPBK-ETH:OTTAWA:ETH-7-1:CTAG::,,,FACILITY;
OPR-LPBK-FC
The Operate Loopback Fibre Channel command operates a facility or terminal loopback on a Fibre Channel facility (LAN port) of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack. The facility must be in an out-of-service management (OOS-MA) state before you can operate a loopback. See RMV-FC on page 3-394 for information about putting a Fibre Channel facility in an OOS-MA state. See RLS-LPBK-FC on page 3-367 for information about releasing a loopback. Following the activation of the loopback, the FC generic OMs should be cleared (INIT-OM-IF) prior to running traffic. This is to guaranty there are no left over counts. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LPBK-FC:[TID]:AID:CTAG::,,,[LPBKTYPE]; Table 3-213 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LPBKTYPE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Fibre Channel facility to put in loopback mode. Correlation tag Loopback type
Table 3-214 AID descriptions AID type FC Command-specific values Purpose FC-slot#-port# Identify the Fibre Channel facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-221 Table 3-215 Parameter descriptions Parameter LPBKTYPE Possible values FACILITY (default) TERMINAL Description The Fibre Channel signal received on the LAN port is sent back out. The SONET signal received on the corresponding WAN port is sent back out.
Note 1: To operate a terminal loopback, the LAN port must be in full duplex mode. See ED-ETH on page 2-227 to change the duplex mode of a LAN port. Note 2: During a terminal loopback, the LAN port sends a link pulse, even though the port is out-of-service. Also, the INFRAMES, INOCTETS, OUTFRAMES, and OUTOCTETS measurements of the LAN port increment, in relation to the number of packets received by the WAN port. Note 3: You can only operate a remote loopback if the port is In-Service. If a port is set to operate a remote loopback, this port will be blocked from going Out-of-Service. Example input
Operate a facility loopback on LAN port 1 of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA:
OPR-LPBK-FC:OTTAWA:FC-7-1:CTAG::,,,FACILITY;
OPR-LPBK-OC12
The Operate Loopback OC12 facility command instructs the equipment to set the specified OC12 facility into loopback mode. To release the facility loopback, use the RLS-LPBK-OC12 command. Loopback modes supported include terminal and facility. The facility must be put in an out-of-service state before a loopback is permitted (see the RMV-OC12 command). Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LPBK-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG::,,,[LPBKTYPE]; Table 3-216 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LPBKTYPE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag Loopback type
Table 3-217 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Details OC-12 OC12-slot#-port# slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS
Table 3-218 Parameter descriptions Parameter LPBKTYPE Possible values Description FACILITY (default) TERMINAL The incoming signal into the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack is connected to the associated return transmitter. The signal leaving the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack is connected to the associated incoming receiver.
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, loopback the signal leaving the OC-12 circuit pack to the associated incoming receiver:
OPR-LPBK-OC12:SEATTLE:OC12-11:CTAG23::,,,TERMINAL;
OPR-LPBK-OC192
The Operate Loopback OC192 facility command instructs the equipment to set the specified OC192 facility into loopback mode. To release the facility loopback, use the RLS-LPBK-OC192 command. Loopback modes supported include terminal and facility. The facility must be put in an out-of-service state before a loopback is permitted (see the RMV-OC192 command). Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LPBK-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG::,,,[LPBKTYPE]; Table 3-219 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LPBKTYPE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag Loopback type
Table 3-220 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 Command-specific values OC192-slot# Details slot # = 11 or 12
Table 3-221 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values Description The incoming signal into the OC-192 circuit pack is connected to the associated return transmitter. The signal leaving the OC-192 circuit pack is connected to the associated incoming receiver.
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, loopback the signal leaving the OC-192 circuit pack to the associated incoming receiver:
OPR-LPBK-OC192:SEATTLE:OC192-12:CTAG23::,,,TERMINAL;
OPR-LPBK-OC3
The Operate Loopback OC3 facility command instructs the equipment to set the specified OC3 facility into loopback mode. To release the facility loopback, use the RLS-LPBK-OC3 command. Loopback modes supported include terminal and facility. The facility must be put in an out-of-service state before a loopback is permitted (see the RMV-OC3 command). Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LPBK-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG::,,,[LPBKTYPE]; Table 3-222 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LPBKTYPE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag Loopback type
Table 3-223 AID descriptions AID type OC-3 Command-specific values Details OC3-slot#-port# slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 port# = 1 for OC-3
Table 3-224 Parameter descriptions Parameter LPBKTYPE Possible values FACILITY (default) Description The incoming signal into the OC-3 circuit pack is connected to the associated return transmitter. The signal leaving the OC-3 circuit pack is connected to the associated incoming receiver.
TERMINAL
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, loopback the incoming signal to the associated return transmitter on the specified OC-3 circuit pack:
OPR-LPBK-OC3:SEATTLE:OC3-3-1:CTAG23::,,,FACILITY;
OPR-LPBK-OC48
The Operate Loopback OC48 facility command instructs the equipment to set the specified OC48 facility into loopback mode. To release the facility loopback, use the RLS-LPBK-OC48 command. Loopback modes supported include terminal and facility. The facility must be put in an out-of-service state before a loopback is permitted (see the RMV-OC48 command). Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LPBK-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG::,,,[LPBKTYPE]; Table 3-225 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LPBKTYPE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag Loopback type
Table 3-226 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 Command-specific values Details OC48-slot# slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
Table 3-227 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values Description The incoming signal into the OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack is connected to the associated return transmitter. The signal leaving the OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack is connected to the associated incoming receiver.
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, loopback the signal leaving the OC-48 circuit pack to the associated incoming receiver:
OPR-LPBK-OC48:SEATTLE:OC48-12:CTAG23::,,,TERMINAL;
OPR-LPBK-T1
The Operate Loopback T1 facility command instructs the equipment to set the specified DS1 facility into loopback mode. Two types of loopback are provided: terminal and facility. The facility must be put in an out-of-service state before a loopback is permitted (RMV-T1 command). To release the facility loopback, use the RLS-LPBK-T1 command. Note: DS3VTx12 circuit packs do not support DS1 facility loopbacks. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LPBK-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::,,,[LPBKTYPE]; Table 3-228 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LPBKTYPE Table 3-229 AID descriptions AID type DS1 Command-specific values Purpose DS1-slot#-port# Identify the DS1 facility where slot# = 4 to 10 port# =1 to 12 Identify DS1s on DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 port = 1 to 84 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to 10 Hport = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag Loopback. See the Parameter descriptions table for details.
DS3V
DS1-slot#-port#-t1#
DS1-1-port-%HLINK-HlineHslot-Hport
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-227 Table 3-230 Parameter descriptions Parameter LPBKTYPE Possible values Description FACILITY (default) A signal received on the copper side of the facility is looped back towards the copper (default). The signal will only pass through the DS1-n mapper on the shelf that has the loopback. Note: DS3VTx12 circuit packs do not support DS1 facility loopbacks. TERMINAL A signal received on the optical side of the facility is looped back towards the optics. The signal will pass through the following cards on the shelf that has the loopback: OC-n => VTX => DSn-n => VTX => OC-n Both directions are looped back (DSn line to DSn line and Network to network)
2WAy
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, for the port 11 facility on the slot 5 DS1 mapper, loopback the incoming signal from the optics back on to the optics:
OPR-LPBK-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-5-11:CTAG::,,,TERMINAL;
At the SEATTLE network element, for the port 11 facility on the slot 5 DS1 mapper, loopback the incoming signal from the copper back on to the copper:
OPR-LPBK-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-5-11:CTAG::,,,FACILITY;
OPR-LPBK-T3
The Operate Loopback T3 facility command instructs the equipment to set the specified DS3 facility into loopback mode. Two types of loopback are provided: terminal and facility. The facility must be put in an out-of-service state before a loopback is permitted (RMV-T3 command). To release the facility loopback, use the RLS-LPBK-T3 command. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-LPBK-T3:[TID]:AID:CTAG::,,,[LPBKTYPE]; Table 3-231 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG LPBKTYPE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag Loopback type. See the Parameter descriptions table for details.
Table 3-232 AID descriptions AID type DS3 Command-specific values Purpose DS3-slot#-port# Identify the DS3 where slot# =3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3VTx12 slot = 3,5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-229 Table 3-233 Parameter descriptions Parameter LPBKTYPE Possible values FACILITY (default) Description A signal received on the copper side of the facility is looped back towards the copper. Note: The signal will only pass through the DS1-n mapper on the shelf that has the loopback. TERMINAL A signal received on the optical side of the facility is looped back towards the optics. Note: The signal will pass through the following cards on the shelf that has the loopback: OC-n => VTX => DSn-n => VTX => OC-n 2WAy Both directions are looped back (DSn line to DSn line and Network to network)
Example input
At the NEWYORK network element, for the port 3 facility on the slot 5 DS3 mapper, loopback the incoming signal from the optics back on to the optics:
OPR-LPBK-T3:NEWYORK:DS3-5-3:CTAG::,,,TERMINAL;
At the NEWYORK network element, for the port 3 facility on the slot 5 DS3 mapper, loopback the incoming signal from the copper back on to the copper:
OPR-LPBK-T3:NEWYORK:DS3-5-3:CTAG::,,,FACILITY;
OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT
The Operate Protection Switch Equipment command instructs the network element to initiate an equipment protection switch request for a DS1, a DS3, an EC1 or a DS3/EC1 circuit pack. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-234 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch command. See the Parameter descriptions table for details. Default is manual.
Table 3-235 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID DS3 AID DS3V AID DSM AID Command-specific values DS1-slot# DS3-slot# DS3V-slot# DS1TM-slot#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#-hport# Purpose Identify the DS1 where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3 where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3VTx12 where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS1 service module where slot# = 1 or 2 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-231 Table 3-235 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4, HLINE = OC3 or OC12 Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4, HLINE = OC3 or OC12 Identify the EC-1 where slot# = 3 to 10
AGGOC3OC12-slot-%HLINKHLINE-Hslot-Hport#
PECN-slot-%HLINK-HlineHslot-Hport
EC1 AID
EC1-slot#
3-232 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-236 Parameter description Parameter Possible values AID SC MAN (default) DS1#4 to 10 DS3 #3 to 10 Description If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. Not applicable. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. DS1#3 LOCKOUT DS1#3 Not applicable. If the AID identifies the protection circuit pack (DS1-3) then the command will prevent any working circuit pack from switching to the protection circuit pack. If a working circuit pack is already on protection, it will be switched back. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then the command will prevent the working circuit pack from switching to protection. If the working circuit pack is on protection, it will be switched back.
DS1#4 to 10
Example input
OPR-PROTNSW-OC12
The Operate Protection Switch OC-12 command instructs the network element to initiate a protection switch request for an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack. You can initiate a protection switch request only for network elements in a linear system. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-OC12 command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-237 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch Command. See the Parameter descriptions table for details.
Table 3-238 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the OC-12 slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS
3-234 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-239 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values Description MAN (default) If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. LOCKOUT (only available on the Protection circuit pack) If the AID identifies the protection circuit pack then the command will prevent any working circuit pack from switching to the protection circuit pack. If a working circuit pack is already on protection, it will be switched back.
FRCD
Example input
OPR-PROTNSW-OC192
The Operate Protection Switch OC-192 command instructs the network element to initiate a protection switch request for an OC-192 circuit pack. You can initiate a protection switch request only for network elements in a linear system. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-OC192 command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-240 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch command
Table 3-241 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# Purpose Identify the OC-192 where slot# = 11, 12
3-236 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-242 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values MAN (default) Description If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. LOCKOUT (valid only for the protection circuit pack in a 1+1 linear system) If the AID identifies the protection circuit pack then the command will prevent any working circuit pack from switching to the protection circuit pack. If a working circuit pack is already on protection, it will be switched back. Prevents the use of the span of the ring for any protection activity and prevents switches anywhere around the ring. Prevents the working channels over the addressed span from accessing protection channels for a switch by disabling the nodes capability to request a ring protection switch.
FRCD
LOCKOUT_PROT (valid only for BLSR systems) LOCKOUT_WRKG (valid only for BLSR systems)
Example input
OPR-PROTNSW-OC3
The Operate Protection Switch OC-3 command instructs the network element to initiate a protection switch request for an OC-3 or an OC-3x4 circuit pack. You can initiate a protection switch request only for network elements in a linear system. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-OC3 command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-243 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch Command. See the Parameter descriptions table for details. Default is manual.
Table 3-244 AID descriptions AID type OC-3 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot# -port# Purpose Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4
3-238 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-245 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values Description MAN (default) If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. LOCKOUT (only available on the Protection circuit pack If the AID identifies the protection circuit pack then the command will prevent any working circuit pack from switching to the protection circuit pack. If a working circuit pack is already on protection, it will be switched back.
FRCD
Example input
OPR-PROTNSW-OC48
The Operate Protection Switch OC-48 command instructs the network element to initiate a protection switch request for an OC-48 or OC-48 STS circuit pack. You can initiate a protection switch request only for network elements in a linear system. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-OC48 command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-246 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch command
Table 3-247 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identify the OC-48 where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
3-240 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-248 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values MAN (default) Description If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. LOCKOUT (valid only for the protection circuit pack in a 1+1 linear system) If the AID identifies the protection circuit pack then the command will prevent any working circuit pack from switching to the protection circuit pack. If a working circuit pack is already on protection, it will be switched back. Prevents the use of the span of the ring for any protection activity and prevents switches anywhere around the ring. Prevents the working channels over the addressed span from accessing protection channels for a switch by disabling the nodes capability to request a ring protection switch.
FRCD
LOCKOUT_PROT (valid only for BLSR systems) LOCKOUT_WRKG (valid only for BLSR systems)
Example input
OPR-PROTNSW-STS1
The Operate Protection Switch STS-1 command instructs the network element to initiate an STS-1 path protection switch request for an OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit pack. Two levels of priority are supported: manual and forced. Lockout is not supported because STS-1 circuits are non-revertive. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-STS1 command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-STS1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-249 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag, an alphanumeric identifier to correlate the command and response messages Switch Command. See the Parameter descriptions table for details. Default is manual.
3-242 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-250 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 path on the OC-3 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 path on the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 Identify the STS-1 path on the OC-48 or OC-48 STS slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 path on the OC-192 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 192
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
Note: ALL is not a valid AID option. Table 3-251 Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values SC MAN (default) Description If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack, then service will be transferred from it to the protection circuit pack if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. Example input
FRCD
Manually switch the STS-1 of the OC-3 in slot 9 port 2 sts 1 to protection mode:
OPR-PROTNSW-STS1:NEWYORK:OC3-9-2-1:CTAG23::MAN;
OPR-PROTNSW-STS12C
The Operate Protection Switch STS-12c command instructs the network element to initiate an STS-12c path protection switch request. Two levels of priority are supported: manual and forced. Lockout is not supported. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-STS12C command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-STS12C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-252 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch Command. See the Parameter descriptions table for details. Default is manual.
Table 3-253 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181
OC48-slot#-sts#
3-244 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-254 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values MAN (default) Description If the AID identifies a working path, then service will be transferred from it to the protection path if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working path, then service will be transferred from it to the protection path if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. Example input
FRCD
Manually switch the STS-12c signal of the OC-12 in slot 9 sts 1 to protection mode:
OPR-PROTNSW-STS12C:NEWYORK:OC12-9-1:CTAG23::MAN;
OPR-PROTNSW-STS24C
The Operate Protection Switch STS-24c command instructs the network element to initiate an STS-24c path protection switch request. Two levels of priority are supported: manual and forced. Lockout is not supported. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-STS24C command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-STS24C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-255 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch Command. See the Parameter descriptions table for details. Default is manual.
Table 3-256 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 25 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, 49, ... 169
STS-24c OC48-slot#-sts# facility AID OC192-slot#-sts# Note: ALL is not a valid AID option.
3-246 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-257 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values MAN (default) Description If the AID identifies a working path, then service will be transferred from it to the protection path if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working path, then service will be transferred from it to the protection path if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. Example input
FRCD
Manually switch the STS-24c signal of the OC-48 in slot 9 sts 1 to protection mode:
OPR-PROTNSW-STS24C:NEWYORK:OC48-9-1:CTAG23::MAN;
OPR-PROTNSW-STS3C
The Operate Protection Switch STS-3c command instructs the network element to initiate an STS-3c path protection switch request for an OC-3 path. Two levels of priority are supported: manual and forced. Lockout is not supported. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-STS3C command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-STS3C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-258 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch Command. See the Parameter descriptions table for details. Default is manual.
3-248 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-259 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-3c path on the OC-3 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 Identify the STS-3c path on the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7 or 10 Identify the STS-3c path on the OC-48 slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...46 Identify the STS-3c path on the OC-192 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...190
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
Note: ALL is not a valid AID option. Table 3-260 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values MAN (default) Description If the AID identifies a working path, then service will be transferred from it to the protection path if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working path, then service will be transferred from it to the protection path if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. Example input
FRCD
Manually switch the STS-3c signal of the OC-3 in slot 9 port 1 sts 1 to protection mode:
OPR-PROTNSW-STS3C:NEWYORK:OC3-9-1-1:CTAG23::MAN;
OPR-PROTNSW-STS48C
The Operate Protection Switch STS-48c command instructs the network element to initiate an STS-48c path protection switch request. Two levels of priority are supported: manual and forced. Lockout is not supported. User switch requests initiated with this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-STS48C command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-STS48C:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-261 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch Command. See the Parameter descriptions table for details. Default is manual.
Table 3-262 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, 97, ... 145
STS-48c OC48-slot#-sts# facility AID OC192-slot#-sts# Note: ALL is not a valid AID option.
3-250 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-263 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values MAN (default) Description If the AID identifies a working path, then service will be transferred from it to the protection path if and only if the latter is neither failed nor servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working path, then service will be transferred from it to the protection path if and only if the latter is not servicing a higher or equal priority request. If the AID identifies a working circuit pack that has already been switched to protection, no switch occurs; however, the priority of the existing switch will be raised to forced. Example input
FRCD
Manually switch the STS-48c signal of the OC-48 in slot 9 sts 1 to protection mode:
OPR-PROTNSW-STS48C:NEWYORK:OC48-9-1:CTAG23::MAN;
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1
The Operate Protection Switch VT1 command instructs the network element to initiate a VT1.5 path protection switch request. Two levels of priority are supported: manual and forced. Lockout is not supported because VT1.5 circuits are non-revertive. Manual and forced switch requests initiated using this command remain active until they are released using the RLS-PROTNSW-VT1 command or overridden by a higher priority switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-264 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch Command. See the Parameter descriptions table for details. Default is manual.
3-252 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-265 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the VT1.5 path on the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path on the OC-12 slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path on the OC-48 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL
OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL
Table 3-266 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values Description MAN (default) Manual VT1.5 path protection switch. Service is transferred from the VT1.5 path identified, to the alternate path only if the path selector is not satisfying a higher or equal priority request. Forced VT1.5 path protection switch. Service is transferred from the VT1.5 path identified, to the alternate path only if the path selector is not satisfying a higher or equal priority request.
FRCD
Example input
Request forced protection switching for VT1 #1, VTG#1, STS1#1, port 2 in slot 10:
OPR-PROTNSW-VT1:SEATTLE:OC3-10-2-1-1-1:CTAG45::FRCD;
OPR-SYNCSW
The Operate Synchronization Switch command instructs the network element to switch synchronization timing reference signals from primary to secondary, or vice versa. The switch completes only if the quality of the two references are the same. The network element always chooses the best quality timing reference for its synchronization reference. Use the RTRV-TMREFIN command to retrieve timing references. Use the SET-SYNCSTIN command to set the synchronization status of the incoming synchronization signal. User synchronization switches initiated using this command remain active until another synchronization switch is activated or they are overridden by a synchronization reference failure. Primary and secondary timing references are assigned using the SET-TMREFIN command. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
OPR-SYNCSW:[TID]::CTAG; Table 3-267 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Switch synchronization from the currently active timing source to the other timing source:
OPR-SYNCSW:NEWYORK::CTAG23;
OPR-TARP-TEF
The Operate TARP TEF (TARP Echo Function) command is used to support TEF for troubleshooting. It is similar to the ping function in the IP network. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
OPR-TARP-TEF:[TID]::CTAG::ADDRTYPE,ADDRESS: [ITERATION=Domain][,RATE=Domain][,TIMEOUT=Domain]; Table 3-268 Syntax definitions Field TID CTAG ADDRTYPE ADDRESS Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag Remote address type can be TL1 System Identifier Type Address (TID) or Network Service Access Point Address Type (NSAP) ADDRESS is the value of ADDRTYPE. If ADDRTYPE is TID, ADDRESS is a string with a maximum of 20 characters. (the SID name) If ADDTYPE is NSAP, ADDRESS is a hexadecimal number with a maximum of 40 digits. (the NSAP number) Number TARP Type 5 messages to be transmitted Rate of sent requests Maximum echo waiting period
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-255 Table 3-269 Parameter descriptions Parameter ITERATION Possible values Integer from 1 to 65535 null RATE Description Iterations of number TARP Type 5 messages to be transmitted Default: 1
Integer from 1000 to Rate of sent requests 180000 A decimal number that ranges from 1000 to 180000 msec Wait for a response before sending each request (in milliseconds) null Default: 1000
TIMEOUT
Integer from 1000 to The maximum time to wait for a response to 180000 each echo request (in milliseconds) A decimal number that ranges from 1000 to 180000 msec null Default: 1500
Input example
Perform a TARP-TEF:
OPR-TARP-TEF:OTTAWA::CTAG12::TID,NEWYORK; Example output TEF:SEQ=1,TID=NEWYORK,NSAP=490000000075D0082E00,TIME=70 TEF:SENT 1, RECEIVED 1,MTNTM/AVETM/MAXTM=70/70/70, SUCCESS=100% Table 3-270 Response parameter descriptions Parameter TEF SEQ TID NSAP TIME Possible value A string with a maximum of 20 characters A decimal number A string with a maximum of 20 characters A number with a maximum of 40 hexadecimal digits A decimal number Description TARP echo function indicator Sequence number Target identifier NSAP Response time in milliseconds
OPR-TOD-SYNC
The Operate Time of Day Synchronization command can be used to force the the SP to request the time from the current NP time of day (TOD) server. The Operate Time of Day Synchronization command can also be used on the NP to force a the NP to attempt to reference its internal clock to one of its provisioned external time servers. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
OPR-TOD-SYNC:TID::CTAG; Table 3-271 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Operate a time of day synchronization on the New York network element, NP.
OPR-TOD-SYNC:NEWYORK::CTAG12;
REPT^ALM^COM
Report Alarm Com is generated by a network element or network processor to report alarms that affect the network processor or the shelf as a whole. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^COM <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> ; Table 3-272 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element or NPx source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
3-258 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-273 AID descriptions AID type Shelf SPx NPx Fan BITS signal Command-specific values SHELF SP NP FAN-slot# BITS-A BITS-B Purpose Identify the network element Identify the shelf processor Identify the network processor Identify the fan unit where slot# = 1 to 3 Identify the BITS A or B input or output Identify the timing reference where slot# = 4 to 10, port# = 1 to 12 Identify the timing reference where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, port# = 1 to 12 Identify the timing reference where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 4 Identify the timing reference where slot# = 3 to 12, port# = 1 to 4 Identify the timing reference where slot# = 3 to 12 Identify the timing reference where slot# = 11 or 12 Identify the remote network element where display = 1 to 16 shelf = user-defined shelf name Identify the power cards
Timing reference DS1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-port# OC3-slot#-port# OC12-slot#-port# OC48-slot# OC192-slot# TBOS display display-shelf
Power cards
PWR-A PWR-B
Table 3-274 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL Applicable AIDs all Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-259 Table 3-274 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values INC SWTOINT BPV AIS LOF LOS FA null SWFTDWN SYNCPRI SYNCSEC INT <srveff> <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> SA or NSA mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND null <dirn> NA RCV null <conddescr> Applicable AIDs BITS signal Shelf BITS signal BITS signal BITS signal BITS signal Shelf SPx, NPx SPx, NPx BITS signal timing ref BITS signal timing ref all all all all all null SPx, NPx all BITs signal null SPx, NPx Description Incoming failure condition Switch to internal synchronization BITS In A or B bipolar violations >10-3 BITS In A or B receive AIS BITS In A or B loss of frame BITS In A or B loss of signal Power failure Software upgrade Software download Primary synchronization reference failure Secondary synchronization reference failure Internal software failure Service affecting or non-service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Failure at the near end of the system Failure at the far end of the system No failure in the system Not applicable Receive failure No failure in the system The detailed text description of the trouble
At 9 pm on March 17, 2002, the timing reference was lost for the BITS out A signal:
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 02-03-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> * 123 REPT ALM COM <cr> <lf> "BITS-A,COM:MN,SYNCPRI,NSA,03-17,21-00-00,NEND,NA:\"Loss of BITSout-A Pri. Timing Ref.\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^EC1
Report Alarm EC-1 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of EC-1 alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^EC1 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-275 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
Command-specific values
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-261 Table 3-277 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL LOS LOF INT INC AIS null <srveff> <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> SA NSA mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND NA RCV Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Loss of signal Loss of frame Internal hardware fault/failure Incoming failure condition Alarm indication signal detected Not applicable Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Near end Not applicable Receive direction only The detailed text description of the trouble
<condtype>
At 9 pm on October 17, 2001, the following alarm report was generated for the EC-1x12 in slot 7, port 1:
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> * 123 REPT ALM EC1 <cr> <lf> "EC1-7-1:MN,INT,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"EC1 Loopback Active\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^ENV
Report Alarm Environment is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of an environmental alarm. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^ENV <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<almtype>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<almmsg> <cr> <lf> ; Table 3-278 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-263 Table 3-280 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL AIRCOMPR AIRCOND AIRDRYR BATDSCHRG BATTERY CLFAN ENGINE ENGOPRG EXPLGS FIRDETR FIRE FLOOD FUSE GEN HIAIR HIHUM HITEMP HIWTR INTRUDER Applicable Description AIDs all Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Air compressor failure Air conditioning failure Air dryer failure Battery discharging Battery failure Cooling fan failure Engine failure Engine operating Explosive gas Fire detector failure Fire Flood Fuse failure Generator failure High airflow High humidity High temperature High water Intrusion
<almtype>
all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all
3-264 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-280 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter <almtype> Values LWBATVG LWFUEL LWHUM LWPRES LWTEMP LWWTR MISC OPENDR PUMP POWER PWR-48 RECT RECTHI RECTLO SMOKE TOXICGAS VENTN <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <almmsg> mm-dd hh-mm-ss character string Applicable Description AIDs all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all all Low battery voltage Low fuel Low humidity Low cable pressure Low temperature Low water Miscellaneous Open door Pump failure Commercial power failure -48 V power supply failure Rectifier failure Rectifier high voltage Rectifier low voltage Smoke Toxic gas Ventilation system failure The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred The detailed text description of the trouble
Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> * 123 REPT ALM ENV <cr> <lf> "1:MN,FLOOD,10-17,21-00-00,\"Flood\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^EQPT
Report Alarm Equipment is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of alarmed equipment related events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^EQPT <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-281 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
3-266 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-282 AID descriptions AID type 2xGigE eqpt 2xGigE 2.5G eqpt 4x100BT eqpt 4x100FX eqpt Command-specific values 1GE-slot# 1GE25G-slot# IPT100-slot# 100FX-slot# Purpose Identify 2xGigE equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Identify 2xGigE 2.5G equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Identify 4x100BT equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 4x100FX equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 2x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 8x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 4x100FX-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify DS1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10
100BTFOS AID 100BTFOS-slot# 100FOST AID 100FOSO AID 1GFOS AID DS1 eqpt DSM eqpt DS3 eqpt DS3VT AID EC1 eqpt 100FOST-slot# 100FOSO-slot# 1GFOS-slot# DS1-slot#
DSnTM-slot#-%HLINK-OC3- Identify the DS1 or DS3 equipment on the DSM where hslot#-hport# slot# = 1, 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 DS3-slot# DS3V-slot# EC1-slot# Identify DS3x3, DS3x12, or DS3x12e equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify EC-1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify DS3/EC-1x12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify ILAN equipment Identify OC-3 or OC-3x4 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 Identify OC-48 equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 Identify OC-192 equipment where slot# = 11 or 12 Identify the protection switch controller Identify the protection switch extender Identify the shelf processor Identify the VTX48, VTX40/10, or STX-192 where slot# =13 or 14
DS3/EC-1 eqpt DS3EC1-slot# ILAN eqpt OC3 eqpt OC12 eqpt OC48 eqpt OC192 ept PSC eqpt PSX eqpt SPx eqpt CLX eqpt ILAN OC3-slot# OC12-slot# OC48-slot# OC192-slot# PSC PSX SP CLX-slot#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-267 Table 3-283 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> <condtype> Values CR, MJ, MN, or CL EQPT INT INC Applicable AIDs Description all all all OC12-slot# IPT100-slot# 100FX-slot# 1GE-slot# 1GE25G-slot# <srveff> <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> SA NSA mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND NA RCV all all all all all OC12-slot# IPT100-slot# 100FX-slot# 1GE-slot# 1GE25G-slot# NEND <conddescr> Character string DS3-slot# all Critical, Major, Minor or Cleared alarm Critical alarm caused by equipment failure Internal hardware fault/failure Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3 to 12 Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3 to 10 Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3 to 10 Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Service affecting Not service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Failure at the near end of the system Not applicable Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3 to 12 Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3 to 10 Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3 to 10 Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Incoming failure condition where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Near end direction only where slot# = 3 to 10 The detailed text description of the trouble
At 9 p.m. on October 17, 2001, an automatic diagnostic ran and passed on the DS1 in slot 5:
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> * 123 REPT ALM EQPT <cr> <lf> "DS1-5:CR,INT,NSA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,NA:\"Circuit Pack Failed\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^FAC
Report Alarm Facility is generated by a network processor to report the occurrence of alarmed facility related events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^FAC <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-284 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
3-270 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-285 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the NPx facility
NPx facility AID ILAN1 ILAN2 COLAN ILANSP ILANNP X25 Table 3-286 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL INT NSA mm-dd Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm
Internal software fault/failure Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred
hh-mm-ss The time when the alarm occurred NEND NA Near end Not applicable The detailed text description of the trouble
REPT^ALM^OC12
Report Alarm OC-12 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of OC-12 alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^OC12 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-287 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
3-272 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-288 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Purpose values Identify the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12, 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-12 where slot# = 1, 2 hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
OC-12 OC12-slot#-port# facility AID MS DSM OC12-slot-1OC12 %HLINK-OC12facility AID hslot#-hport# Table 3-289 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL LOS LOF INT INC AIS APSC APSMM <srveff> SA NSA <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> mm-dd
Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Loss of signal Loss of frame Internal hardware fault/failure Incoming failure condition Alarm indication signal detected Automatic protection switch channel condition Automatic protection switch mode mismatch condition Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred
<condtype>
hh-mm-ss The time when the alarm occurred NEND NA RCV Near end Not applicable Receive direction only The detailed text description of the trouble
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-273 Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC12NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM OC12 <cr> <lf> "OC12-10-1:C,INC,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"OC12 Signal Degrade\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^OC192
Report Alarm OC-192 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of OC-192 alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^OC192 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-290 Syntax defintion Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
Command-specific values
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-275 Table 3-292 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL LOS LOF INT INC AIS APSC APSMM SWEX RSWS <srveff> SA NSA <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> mm-dd Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Loss of signal Loss of frame Internal hardware fault/failure Incoming failure condition Alarm indication signal detected Automatic protection switch channel condition Automatic protection switch mode mismatch condition Switch exerciser failure condition Traffic squelched condition Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred
<condtype>
hh-mm-ss The time when the alarm occurred NEND FEND NA RCV TRMT Near end Far end Not applicable Receive direction only Transmit direction only The detailed text description of the trouble
Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC192NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM OC192 <cr> <lf> "OC192-11:C,INC,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"OC192 Signal Degrade\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^OC3
Report Alarm OC-3 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of OC-3 alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^OC3 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-293 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-277 Table 3-294 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the OC-3 facility where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 4 Identify the OC-3 facility on the DSM interface where slot# = 1 or 2, port# = 1 to 84, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
Table 3-295 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> <condtype> Values CR, MJ, MN CL LOS LOF INT INC AIS APSC APSMM <srveff> SA NSA <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND NA RCV Description Critical, Major, Minor, or Cleared Alarm Loss of signal Loss of frame Internal hardware fault/failure Incoming failure condition Alarm indication signal detected Automatic protection switch channel condition Automatic protection switch mode mismatch condition Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Near end Not applicable Receive direction only The detailed text description of the trouble
Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM OC3 <cr> <lf> "OC3-10-1:C,INC,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"OC3 Signal Degrade\"" ; <cr> <lf> TL1 ReferencePart 2 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
REPT^ALM^OC48
Report Alarm OC-48 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of OC-48 alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^OC48 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-296 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk> Table 3-297 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 facility AID
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-279 Table 3-298 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL LOS LOF INT INC AIS APSC APSMM SWEX RSWS <srveff> SA NSA <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> mm-dd Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Loss of signal Loss of frame Internal hardware fault/failure Incoming failure condition Alarm indication signal detected Automatic protection switch channel condition Automatic protection switch mode mismatch condition Switch exerciser failure condition Traffic squelched condition Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred
<condtype>
hh-mm-ss The time when the alarm occurred NEND FEND NA RCV TRMT Near end Far end Not applicable Receive direction only Transmit direction only The detailed text description of the trouble
Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC48NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM OC48 <cr> <lf> "OC48-11:C,INC,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"OC48 Signal Degrade\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^SECU
Report Alarm Security is generated when the shelf processor or network processor detects a security alarm, for example, an incoming network access violation or intrusion attempt. The message is generated to users with a UPC level of 4 or higher. Security alarms have an impact of major, non-service affecting. Security alarms can be manually cleared by accounts with an UPC level of 4 or higher. Intrusion attempt alarms are also automatically cleared when the lockout expires. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> ^<atag>^REPT^ALM^SECU <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-299 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Table 3-300 AID descriptions AID type SPx NPx Command-specific values SP NP Purpose Identify the shelf processor Identify the network processor Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-281 Table 3-301 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> <condtype> <srveff> <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> Values MJ CL INT NSA mm-dd Description Major alarm Cleared alarm Internal Non-service affecting The date when the alarm occurred
hh-mm-ss The time when the alarm occurred NEND NA Near end Not applicable The detailed text description of the alarm
Example messages <cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> 123 REPT ALM SECU <cr> <lf> "SP:MJ,INT,NSA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,NA:\"Intrusion Attempt\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^STS1
Report Alarm STS-1 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of STS-1 alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^STS1<cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-302 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-283 Table 3-303 AID descriptions AID type STS path AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#
OC12-slot#-1-sts#-%HLINK- Identify the STS-1 where hslot#-hport# slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1 to 12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Identify STS-1 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12
OC192-slot#
EC1-slot#-port#
3-284 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-303 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values OC3-slot#-1-sts#-%HLINKOC3-hslot#-hport# Purpose Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 6 port# = 1 to 8 sts# = 1 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
WAN-slot-port-sts-%HLINKHline-hslot#-hport#
Table 3-304 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL SLMF AIS INC <srveff> SA NSA Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Signal label mismatch failure Alarm indication signal detected Incoming failure condition Service affecting Non service affecting
<condtype>
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-285 Table 3-304 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> Values mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND RCV Description The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Near end Receive direction only The detailed text description of the trouble
Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM STS1 <cr> <lf> "OC3-9-1-1:CR,AIS,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"STS Rx AIS\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^STS12C
Report Alarm STS-12c is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of STS-12c alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^STS12C <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-305 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-287 Table 3-306 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 Command-specific values Purpose OC12-slot#-port#-sts# OC12-slot#-port#-ALL OC12-ALL slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1
OC-48
OC-192
WAN
Table 3-307 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values MJ MN CL PAYUEQ PAYERR <srveff> SA NSA <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND RCV Description Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Payload unequipped Payload error Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Near end Receive direction only
<condtype>
<conddescr> character string The detailed text description of the trouble Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC12NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM STS12C <cr> <lf> "OC12-9-1-1:CR,AIS,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"STS12C Rx AIS\"" ; <cr> <lf> TL1 ReferencePart 2 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
REPT^ALM^STS24C
Report Alarm STS-24c is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of STS-24c alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^STS24C <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-308 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-289 Table 3-309 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC48-ALL OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ..., 169 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 or 2, sts# = 1
OC-192
WAN
Table 3-310 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL PAYUEQ PAYERR <srveff> SA NSA <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND RCV Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Payload unequipped Payload error Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Near end Receive direction only
<condtype>
<conddescr> character string The detailed text description of the trouble Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC48NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM STS24C <cr> <lf> "OC48-9-1-1:CR,AIS,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"STS24C Rx AIS\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^STS3C
Report Alarm STS-3c is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of STS-3c alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^STS3C <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-311 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-291 Table 3-312 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-3c where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 4, sts# = 1
OC12-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-3c where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12, 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 OC48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-3c where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48, slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, ..., 46 Identify the STS-3c where slot# = 11 or 12, sts# = 1, 4, 7, ..., 190
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, or 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1, 4, 7, ... 19 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P Table 3-313 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> <condtype> Values CR, MJ, MN, or CL SLMF AIS INC PAYUEQ PAYERR <srveff> <ocrdat> <ocrtm> SA or NSA mm-dd hh-mm-ss Description Critical, major, minor, or cleared alarm Signal label mismatch failure Alarm indication signal detected Incoming failure condition Payload unequipped Payload error Service affecting or non-service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred
3-292 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-313 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter <locn> <dirn> Values NEND RCV Description Near end Receive direction only The detailed text description of the trouble
Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM STS3C <cr> <lf> "OC3-9-1-1:CR,AIS,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"STS3C Rx AIS\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^STS48C
Report Alarm STS-48c is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of STS-48c alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^STS48C <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-314 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
3-294 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-315 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC48-ALL OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL Purpose slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, ..., 145
OC-192
Table 3-316 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL PAYUEQ PAYERR <srveff> SA NSA <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND RCV Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Payload unequipped Payload error Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Near end Receive direction only
<condtype>
<conddescr> character string The detailed text description of the trouble Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC48NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM STS48C <cr> <lf> "OC48-9-1:CR,AIS,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"STS48C Rx AIS\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^T1
Report Alarm T1 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of DS1 alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^T1 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-317 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
3-296 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-318 AID descriptions AID type DS1 facility AID DS3VT facility AID DSM AID Command-specific values Purpose DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-port#-t1# Identify the DS1 facility where slot# = 4 to 10, port# = 1 to 12 Identify the DS1 facility on DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, port# = 1 to 12, t1# = 1 to 28 Identify the DS1s on the DSM where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 port# = 1 to 84, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
DS1-1-port#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#-hport#
Table 3-319 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL LOS LOF INT INC AIS SA NSA mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND NA RCV TRMT character string Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Loss of signal Loss of frame Internal hardware fault/failure Incoming failure condition Alarm indication signal Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Near end Not applicable Receive direction only Transmit direction only The detailed text description of the trouble
<condtype>
<conddescr>
Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> * 123 REPT ALM T1 <cr> <lf> "DS1-5-12:MJ,INT,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"DS1 Loopback Active\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^T3
Report Alarm T3 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of DS3 alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^T3 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-320 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
3-298 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-321 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the DS3 facility where slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9, port# = 1 to 12 Identify the DS3 facility where slot# = 3, 5, port# = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
Table 3-322 Parameter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL LOS LOF INT INC AIS <srveff> SA NSA <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND NA RCV TRMT Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Loss of signal Loss of frame Internal hardware fault/failure Incoming failure condition Alarm indication signal Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred The time when the alarm occurred Near end Not applicable Receive direction only Transmit direction only
<condtype>
<conddescr> character string The detailed text description of the trouble Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> * 123 REPT ALM T3 <cr> <lf "DS3-5-3:MN,INT,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"DS3 Loopback Active\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^ALM^VT1
Report Alarm VT1 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of VT1.5 alarmed events. In general, an alarmed event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^ALM^VT1 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>, <locn>,<dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-323 Syntax defintion Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Possible alarm code values in decreasing order of severity: *C (Critical alarm) ** (Major alarm) *^ (Minor alarm) A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
<atag> <rspblk>
3-300 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-324 AID descriptions AID type VT1.5 facility AID Command-specific values EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# Purpose Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path on DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# =3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt#
OC3-slot#-1-sts#-vtg#-vt#%HLINK-OC3-hslot#-hport#
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt#
OC12-slot#-1-sts#-vtg#-vt#%HLINK-OC12-hslot#-hport#
OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt#
DS1-slot#-port#-t1#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-301 Table 3-325 Paramter descriptions Parameter <ntfcncde> Values CR MJ MN CL SLMF AIS INC <srveff> SA NSA <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> mm-dd Description Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm Cleared alarm Signal label match failure Alarm indication signal detected Incoming failure condition Service affecting Non service affecting The date when the alarm occurred
<condtype>
hh-mm-ss The time when the alarm occurred NEND RCV Near end Receive direction only The detailed text description of the trouble
Example message <cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> *C 123 REPT ALM VT1 <cr> <lf> "OC3-10-1-2-2-1:CR,AIS,SA,10-17,21-00-00,NEND,RCV:\"VT Rx AIS\"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^CONFIG^CHG
Report Configuration Change is generated when the functionality detects that there may be a change in the configured network administered by the network processor. Typically this is due to expansion and reconfiguration of an existing network. An example of this might be the upgrading of a point-to-point linear network to a linear ADM chain or the addition of nodes to a ring. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> <almcde>^<atag>^REPT^CONFIG^CHG <cr> <lf> ; Table 3-326 Syntax defintion Field <sid> <date> <time> <almcde> <atag> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss A^ (Automatic message) Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message
REPT^DBCHG
Report Database Change is generated by the network element to which a name change (TID) or account change (UID) was made. It is also generated by BLSR configuration, cross-connect, FFP and SOC commands. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^DBCHG <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. The format for an NE name change is:
^^^"<msgtype>:<netid>,<oldtid>,<newtid>" <cr> <lf>
Note: Since an atag of 0000000 is always used for this type of report, they are not logged into the automatic output (AO) buffer. The format for all other commands that cause a configuration change (level 1 to level 4) commands is:
^^^<DBCHGSEQ=seqnum>:<DATE>,<TIME>:<userid=domain>,<priority= domain>:<commandcode>:<aid1><,aid2>:<ctag>:<position1> <,position2>:<keyword1=domain><,keyword2=domain]>:<pst>,<sst> <cr> <lf>
Note 1: When issued for a SID change, REPT DBCHG is sent only to the TL1 session that originated the change. Note 2: When issued for a UID change, REPT DBCHG is sent to all active TL1 sessions to the shelf processor or network processor that issued the change. The affected TL1 sessions are those that have a UPC equal or greater to the UPC of the UID that was changed.
3-304 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-327 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message. Since an atag of 0000000 is always used for this type of report, they are not logged into the automatic output (AO) buffer Response block. See the following table for details.
<rspblk>
Table 3-328 Parameter descriptions Parameter <msgtype> <netid> <oldtid> <newtid> <olduid> <newuid> <DBCHGSEQ= seqnum> <uid=domain> <command code> <aid1><,aid2> <ctag> <position1> <,position2 <keyword1=domain> <,keyword2=domain> <pst> <sst> Values NNC SAC Description NE name change System account change Target identifier Old target identifier New target identifier Old user identifier New user identifier REPT- DBCHG sequence number User name that executed the command The provisioning command issued (for example, ENT-CRS-STS1) Optional and specific to the provisioning command. Correlation tag All position defined parameters specified in the command All keyword defined parameters that were specified in the command Primary state from the command Secondary state from the command
At 9 p.m. on October 17, 2001, the name of NE01TID was changed to OC3NE01. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> NE01TID 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 000000 REPT DBCHG <cr> <lf> "NNC:NE01TID,NE01TID,OC3NE01" <cr> <lf>
At 10 p.m. on January 18, 2002, the user identifier EXPRESS01 on network element BOSTON was changed to EXPRESS02. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> BOSTON 02-01-18 22:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 000000 REPT DBCHG <cr> <lf> "SAC:BOSTON,EXPRESS01,EXPRESS02" <cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^COM
Report Event Com is generated by a network element or network processor to report alarms that affect the network processor or the shelf as a whole. In general, an event causes a standing condition and has immediate or potential impact on the operation or performance of the entity. Some form of maintenance effort is required to restore normal operation or performance of the entity after the event has occurred. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^COM <cr> <lf> <rspblk> +
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>,<dirn>: <conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-329 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Table 3-330 AID descriptions AID type SPx NPx Shelf BITS signal Command-specific values Purpose SP NP SHELF BITS-A BITS-B Identify the network element Identify the network processor Identify the shelf Identify the BITS-A or BITS-B input or output Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-307 Table 3-330 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Timing reference Command-specific values Purpose DS1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-port# OC3-slot#-port# OC12-slot#-port# Identify the timing reference where slot# = 4 to 10, port# = 1 to 12 Identify the timing reference where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9, port# = 1 to 12 Identify the timing reference where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 4 Identify the timing reference where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the timing reference where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS Identify the timing reference where slot# = 11 or 12 Identify the remote network element where display = 1 to 16 shelf = user-defined shelf name
OC48-slot#
Table 3-331 Parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values INC FEMCOD Applicable AIDs Description BITS signal TBOS display Incoming failure condition Far end SID change Switch to holdover synchronization Switch to freerun synchronization Synchronization reference switch Software download Internal software failure
HLDOVRSYNC Shelf FRNGSYNC SYNCREFSW Shelf BITS signal Synchronization reference SPx or NPx SPx or NPx
SWFTDWN INT
3-308 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-331 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter <condeff> Values SC TC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss Applicable AIDs Description all Standing condition raised Transient condition Standing condition cleared The date when the event occurred The time when the event occurred The detailed text description of the trouble Failure at the near end of the system Failure at the far end of the system Not applicable Receive failure
<ocrdat> <ocrtm>
all all
<conddescr> character string all <locn> NEND FEND all TBOS display
<dirn>
NA RCV
Example message
At 9 p.m. on March 17, 2001, during a software upgrade on network element NEWYORK, the following event is reported:
<cr> <lf> <lf> NEWYORK 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 123 REPT EVT COM <cr> <lf> "SP:SWFTDWN,TC,10-17,21-00-00:" Invoke upgrade passed Slot(s) 05 06 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 passed"" ; <cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^EC1
Report Event EC-1 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed EC-1 related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^EC1 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-332 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Table 3-333 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify EC-1 facility where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
3-310 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-334 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> <condeff> <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> <monval> <thlev> <tmper> Values T-MONTYPE TC mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND TRMT RCV 1 and up 1 and up 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Transient condition Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far-end Transmit (away from the node) Receive (onto the node) Measured value of a monitored parameter Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period: 15 minute, 1 day, or untimed. Condition description
<conddescr> text message Table 3-335 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL
Description Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds- Line Unavailable Seconds - Line
Example message
At 00:29:23 on 1 January 2002 a transient threshold-crossing of Severely Errored Seconds - Section of 1, where the threshold level is 1, is recorded for the EC-1 circuit pack in slot 7, port 1 of FMX70.
<cr> <lf> <lf> FMX70 02-01-01 00:29:23^M A 000012 REPT EVT EC1^M "EC1-7-1:T-SESS,TC,01-01,00-29-23,NEND,RCV,1,1,15-MIN :\"T-SESS\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^EQPT
Report Event Equipment is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed equipment related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^EQPT <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-336 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Table 3-337 AID descriptions AID type 2xGigE eqpt Command-specific values 1GE-slot# Purpose Identify 2xGigE equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for double slot circuit pack and slot#= 3 to 10 for single slot 2xGigE circuit packs. Identify 2xGigE 2.5G equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Identify 4x100BT equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 4x100FX equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
3-312 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-337 (continued) AID descriptions AID type 2x100BT-P2P eqpt 100FOST AID 100FOSO AID 1GFOS AID Command-specific values 100BTFOS-slot# 100FOST-slot# 100FOSO-slot# 1GFOS-slot# Purpose Identify 2x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 8x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 4x100FX-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify DS1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS1 equipment on the DSM where slot# = 1, 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify DS3 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3 equipment on the MS DSM where slot# = 1, 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the DS3x3, DS3x12, or DS3x12e equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# =3 to 10 Identify the EC-1x3 or EC-1x12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify DS3/EC-1x12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify ILAN equipment
DS1 eqpt
DS1-slot# DS1TM-slot#-%HLINKOC3-hslot#-hport#
DS3 eqpt
DS3-slot# PECN-slot#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#-hport#
DS3 eqpt
DS3-slot#
DS3VT eqpt EC1 eqpt DS3/EC-1 eqpt ILAN eqpt MS DSM eqpt
AGGOC3OC12-slot#Identify aggregate equipment where %HLINK-HLINE-hslot#- slot# = 1, 2, HLINE = OC3 or OC12, hport# hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 AGGOC3-slot#%HLINK-HLINE-hslot#hport#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-313 Table 3-337 (continued) AID descriptions AID type NPx eqpt OC3 eqpt OC12 eqpt Command-specific values NP OC3-slot# OC12-slot# Purpose Identify the network processor Identify the OC-3 or OC-3x4 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 Identify the OC-48 or OC-48 STS equipment where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS Identify the OC-192 equipment where slot# = 11 or 12 Identify the protection switch controller Identify the protection switch extender Identify the shelf processor Identify the network element Identify the VTX48, VTX40/10, or STX-192 equipment where slot# = 13 or 14
OC48 eqpt
OC48-slot#
OC192 ept PSC eqpt PSX eqpt SPx eqpt Shelf CLX eqpt
3-314 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-338 Parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values INC Applicable AIDs Description IPT100-slot# 100FX-slot# 1GE-slot# FWGADWNLD IPT100-slot# 100FX-slot# 1GE-slot# 1GE25G-slot# INT <condeff> TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND NA all all Switch to protection inhibited where slot# = 3 to 12 Switch to protection inhibited where slot# = 3 to 10 Switch to protection inhibited where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 FPGA download where slot# = 3 to 10 FPGA download where slot# = 3 to 10 FPGA download where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 FPGA download where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Internal software failure Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared The date when the event occurred The time when the event occurred Failure at the near end of the system Not applicable The detailed text description of the trouble
Example message
At 9 p.m. on March 21, 2002, the DS1 in slot 4 switches to protection. This message will be returned.
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 02-03-21 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 123 REPT EVT EQPT <cr> <lf> DS1-4:INT,SC,03-21,21-00-00,NEND,NA:\"Auto Switch Complete"\ ;
REPT^EVT^INVENTORY
Report Event Inventory is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of inventory events. The event being reported is for the insertion or removal of circuit packs from the shelf. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^INVENTORY <cr> <lf> <rspblk> +;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<ACTION=descriptor>:<aid>:<CTYPE=domain>,<SER=domain>, <PEC=domain>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-339 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
Table 3-340 Parameter descriptions Parameter <Descriptor> <aid> <ctype=domain> <serial=domain> <pec=domain> Values INSERT REMOVE see AID description table Description The action that was performed Circuit pack and slot number circuit pack type circuit pack serial number circuit pack product engineering code (PEC)
3-316 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-341 AID descriptions AID type 2xGigE eqpt Command-specific values 1GE-slot# Purpose Identify 2xGigE equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for double slot circuit pack and slot#= 3 to 10 for single slot 2xGigE circuit packs. Identify 2xGigE 2.5G equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Identify the 4x100BT circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 4x100FX equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 8x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 4x100FX-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify DS1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10
2xGigE 2.5G eqpt 4x100BT eqpt 4x100FX eqpt 2x100BT-P2P eqpt 100FOST AID 100FOSO AID 1GFOS AID
DS1 eqpt
DS1-slot#
DS1TM-slot#-%HLINK- Identify the DS1 equipment on the DSM HLINE-hslot#-hport# where HLINE= OC3 or OC12, slot# = 1, 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 DS3 eqpt DS3-slot# AGGOC3OC12-slot#%HLINKHLINE-hslot#-hport# AGGOC3-slot#%HLINK-HLINE-hslot#hport# DS3 eqpt DS3-slot# Identify DS1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS1 equipment on the MS DSM where HLINE= OC3 or OC12, slot# = 1, 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-317 Table 3-341 (continued) AID descriptions AID type DS3VT eqpt EC1 eqpt DS3/EC-1 eqpt ILAN eqpt NPx eqpt OC3 eqpt OC12 eqpt Command-specific values DS3V-slot# EC1-slot# DS3EC1-slot# ILAN NP OC3-slot# OC12-slot# Purpose Identify the DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# =3 to 10 Identify the EC-1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify DS3/EC-1x12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify ILAN equipment Identify the network processor Identify the OC-3 or OC-3x4 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-48 or OC-48 STS equipment where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS Identify the OC-192 equipment where slot# = 11 or 12 Identify the expansion equipment where slot = 3 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot = 3 to 10 hport = 1 to 4 Identify the expansion equipment where slot = 3 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot = 3 to 10 hport = 1 to 4 Identify the expansion equipment where slot = 1, 2 subslot = 1 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot = 3 to 10 hport = 1 to 4 Identify the protection switch controller
OC48 eqpt
OC48-slot#
OC192-slot# PECN-slot-%HLINKHline-hslot-hport
PFOST
PFOST-slot-%HLINKHline-hslot-hport
POC
PSC eqpt
PSC
3-318 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-341 (continued) AID descriptions AID type PSX eqpt SPx eqpt Shelf CLX eqpt Command-specific values PSX SP SHELF CLX-slot# Purpose Identify the protection switch extender Identify the shelf processor Identify the network element Identify the VTX48, VTX40/10, or STX-192 equipment where slot# = 13 or 14
Example message
At 10:15 p.m. on October 15, 2002, an OC-12 circuit pack was inserted in slot 4. This message will be returned.
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 02-10-15 22:15:00 <cr> <lf> A 123 REPT EVT EQPT <cr> <lf> ACTION=INSERT:OC12-4:CTYPE=OC12,SERIAL=NNTM01GZ34R76, PEC=NTN404AA ;
REPT^EVT^LOG
Report Event Log is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of log events. The event being reported is for activities that have occurred on the system. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^LOG <cr> <lf> <rspblk> ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<timestamp>:<uid=domain>:<priority=domain>,<status=domain> :<commandcode>:<aid>:<ctag>:<positionparms>: <keywordparms=domain>:<pst>,<sst>:<failure string>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-342 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
Table 3-343 Parameter descriptions Parameter <timestamp> <uid=domain> <priority=domain> <status=domain> <commandcode> <aid> <ctag> <positionparms> Description Date and time command was executed User name that executed the command The priority of the message The status of the command (for example: completed, failed, or IDNV) Name of the command that was executed The AID that received the command Correlation tag All position defined parameters specified in the command
3-320 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-343 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter <keywordparms> <pst> <sst> Example message Description All keyword defined parameters specified in the command Primary state from the command Secondary state from the command
At 10:15 p.m. on October 15, 2002, the following failure message was returned for an input command:
ENT-EQPT:FGXSPX107:EC1-11:D;IP D FGXSPX107 02-10-17 17:00:00 D DENY IIAC /*Input, Invalid ACcess identifier*/ M
REPT^EVT^OC12
Report Event OC-12 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed OC-12 related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^OC12 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-344 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following AID and Parameter description tables for details.
3-322 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-345 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 facility AID Command-specific values Purpose OC12-slot#-port# Identify the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-12 where slot = 1, 2 hslot = 3 to 10 hport = 1 to 4
OC12-slot#-1-%HLINKOC12-hslot-hport
Table 3-346 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values T-MONTYPE PS INT TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT NA 1 and up 1 and up 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT text message Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Protection switch exerciser Internal hardware or software failure Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period: 15 minute, 1 day, or untimed. Condition description
<condeff>
<conddescr>
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-323 Table 3-347 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL Description Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds- Line Unavailable Seconds - Line
Example message
At 9 a.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-12 in slot 10 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^NE1^01-10-17^9-00 <cr> <lf> A^^123^REPT^EVT^OC12 <cr> <lf> ^^^"OC12-10:T-CVS,TC,10-17,9-0-0,NEND,RCV,10,10,15-MIN :\"T-CVS\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^OC192
Report Event OC-192 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed OC-192 related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^OC192 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-348 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following AID and Parameter description tables for details.
Table 3-349 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Values Purpose Identify the OC-192 where slot# = 11 or 12
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-325 Table 3-350 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values T-MONTYPE PS INT TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT NA 1 and up 1 and up 15-MIN, 1-DAY, or 1-UNT Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Protection switch exerciser Internal hardware or software failure Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period: 15 minute, 1 day, or untimed. Condition description
<condeff>
<conddescr> text message Table 3-351 Montype paramter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL
Description Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds- Line Unavailable Seconds - Line
Example message
At 9 a.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-48 in slot 11 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^NE1^01-10-17^9-00 <cr> <lf> A^^123^REPT^EVT^OC192 <cr> <lf> ^^^"OC192-11:T-CVS,TC,10-17,9-0-0,NEND, RCV,10,10,15-MIN:\"T-CVS\"<cr> <lf> TL1 ReferencePart 2 of 4 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
REPT^EVT^OC3
Report Event OC-3 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed OC-3 related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^OC3 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-352 Syntax definitions Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following AID and Parameter description tables for details.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-327 Table 3-353 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the OC-3 or OC-3x4 where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 4
OC3-slot#-%HLINK-HLINE- Identify the OC-3 equipment on the DSM hslot#-hport# or MS DSM where slot# = 1, 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Table 3-354 Parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values T-MONTYPE PS INT TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT NA 1 and up 1 and up 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT <conddescr> text message Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Protection switch exerciser Internal hardware or software failure Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period 15 minute 1 day untimed Condition description
<condeff>
3-328 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-355 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL Description Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds- Line Unavailable Seconds - Line
Example message
At 9 a.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-3 in slot 10 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^NE1^01-10-17^9-00 <cr> <lf> A^^123^REPT^EVT^OC3 <cr> <lf> ^^^"OC3-10-1:T-CVS,TC,10-17,9-0-0,NEND, RCV,10,10,15-MIN:\"T-CVS\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^OC48
Report Event OC-48 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed OC-48 related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^OC48 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-356 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following AID and Parameter description tables for details.
Table 3-357 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 facility AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identify the OC-48 or OC-48 STS where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48
3-330 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-358 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values T-MONTYPE PS INT TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND or FEND RCV, TRMT, or NA 1 and up 1 and up 15-MIN, 1-DAY, or 1-UNT Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Protection switch exerciser Internal hardware or software failure Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end or far end Receive (onto the node), Transmit (away from the node), or Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period: 15 minute, 1 day, or untimed Condition description
<condeff>
<conddescr> text message Table 3-359 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVS ESS SESS SEFSS CVL ESL SESL UASL
Description Coding Violations - Section Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Seconds - Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds- Line Unavailable Seconds - Line
Example message
At 9 a.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-48 in slot 11 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^NE1^01-10-17^9-00 <cr> <lf> A^^123^REPT^EVT^OC48 <cr> <lf> ^^^"OC48-11:T-CVS,TC,10-17,9-0-0,NEND, RCV,10,10,15-MIN:\"T-CVS\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^STS1
Report Event STS1 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed STS-1 related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^STS1 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-360 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following AID and Parameter description tables for details.
3-332 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-361 AID descriptions AID type STS path AID Command-specific Values Purpose OC3-slot#-port#-sts# Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#
OC12-slot#-1-sts#-%HLINK Identify the STS-1 where -OC12-hslot#-hport# slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1 to 12 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 OC-48-slot#-sts# Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1 to 192
OC-192-slot#-sts#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-333 Table 3-361 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Values Purpose EC1-slot#-port# Identify STS-1 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 Identify the STS-1 where slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1 to 3 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the STS-1 facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 3 for 4x100FX-P2Por 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 to 21 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P
OC3-slot#-1-sts#-%HLINKOC3-hslot#-hport#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
Table 3-362 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> <condeff> Values T-MONTYPE INT TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT NA 1 and up Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Internal hardware or software failure Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter
<monval>
3-334 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-362 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <thlev> <tmper> 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT <conddescr> text message Table 3-363 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVP ESP SESP ALSP UASP Description Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path AIS/LOP Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Values 1 and up Description Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period 15 minute 1 day untimed Condition description
Example message
At 9 a.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-3 in slot 10, port 1, sts 3 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^NE1^01-10-17^9-00 <cr> <lf> A^^123^REPT^EVT^STS1 <cr> <lf> ^^^"OC3-10-1-3:T-CVP,TC,10-17,9-0-0,NEND, RCV,10,10,15-MIN:\"T-CVP\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^STS12C
Report Event STS-12c is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed STS-12c related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^STS12C <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-364 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
3-336 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-365 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 Command-specific values Purpose OC12-slot#-port#-sts# OC12-slot#-port#-ALL OC12-ALL slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1
OC-48
OC-192
WAN
Table 3-366 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values T-MONTYPE INT PAYCHG TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT NA 1 and up Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Internal hardware or software failure Payload change Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter
<condeff>
<monval>
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-337 Table 3-366 (continued) Response parameter descriptions Parameter <thlev> <tmper> 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT <conddescr> text message Table 3-367 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVP ESP SESP ALSP UASP Description Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path AIS/LOP Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Values 1 and up Description Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period 15 minute 1 day untimed Condition description
Example message
At 9 a.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-12 in slot 3 port 1 sts 1 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^NE1^01-10-17^9-00 <cr> <lf> A^^123^REPT^EVT^STS12C <cr> <lf> ^^^"OC12-3-1-1:T-CVP,TC,10-17,9-0-0,NEND, RCV,10,10,15-MIN:\"T-CVP\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^STS24C
Report Event STS-24c is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed STS-24c related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^STS24C <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-368 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-339 Table 3-369 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 Command-specific Values OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC48-ALL OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL WAN-slot#-port#-sts# Purpose slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1, 25 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, ..., 169 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 sts# = 1
OC-192
WAN
Table 3-370 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values T-MONTYPE INT PAYCHG TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT NA 1 and up 1 and up 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT <conddescr> text message Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Internal hardware or software failure Payload change Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period 15 minute 1 day untimed Condition description
<condeff>
3-340 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-371 Montype paramter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVP ESP SESP ALSP UASP Description Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path AIS/LOP Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path
Example message
At 9 a.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-48 in slot 3 sts 1 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^NE1^01-10-17^9-00 <cr> <lf> A^^123^REPT^EVT^STS24C <cr> <lf> ^^^"OC48-3-1:T-CVP,TC,10-17,9-0-0,NEND, RCV,10,10,15-MIN:\"T-CVP\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^STS3C
Report Event STS-3c is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed STS-3c related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^STS3C <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-372 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
3-342 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-373 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Values Purpose Identify the STS-3c where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 Identify the STS-3c where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, or 10 Identify the STS-3c where slot# = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, ..., 46 Identify the STS-3c where slot# = 11 or 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, ..., 190 Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN port where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P, or 2x100BT-P2P port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1 for 2x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, or 8x100BT-P2P sts# = 1, 4, 7, ... 19 for 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, or 2xGigE-P2P
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#
OC48-slot#-sts#
OC192-slot#-sts#
WAN-slot#-port#-sts#
STS3C WAN-slot-port-sts-%HLINK- Identify the STS-3c facility on the WAN MS DSM Hline-hslot-hport port where WAN slot# = 3 to 6 facility AID port = 1 to 8 sts = 1 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot = 3 to 10 hport = 1 to 4
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-343 Table 3-374 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values T-MONTYPE INT PAYCHG TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT NA 1 and up 1 and up 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT <conddescr> text message Table 3-375 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVP ESP SESP ALSP UASP Description Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path AIS/LOP Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Internal hardware or software failure Payload change Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period 15 minute 1 day untimed Condition description
<condeff>
At 9 a.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-3 in slot 10 port 1 sts 1 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^NE1^01-10-17^9-00 <cr> <lf> A^^123^REPT^EVT^STS3C <cr> <lf> ^^^"OC3-10-1-1:T-CVP,TC,10-17,9-0-0,NEND, RCV,10,10,15-MIN:\"T-CVP\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^STS48C
Report Event STS-48c is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed STS-48c related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^STS48C <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf>
\
Table 3-376 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
3-346 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-377 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 Command-specific Values OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC48-ALL OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL OC192-ALL Purpose slot# = 3 to 12 sts# = 1 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 49, ..., 145
OC-192
Table 3-378 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values T-MONTYPE INT PAYCHG TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT NA 1 and up 1 and up 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT <conddescr> text message Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Internal hardware or software failure Payload change Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period 15 minute 1 day untimed Condition description
<condeff>
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-347 Table 3-379 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter <montype> Possible values CVP ESP SESP ALSP UASP Description Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path AIS/LOP Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path
Example message
At 9 a.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-48 in slot 3 sts 1 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^NE1^01-10-17^9-00 <cr> <lf> A^^123^REPT^EVT^STS48C <cr> <lf> ^^^"OC48-3-1:T-CVP,TC,10-17,9-0-0,NEND, RCV,10,10,15-MIN:\"T-CVP\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^T1
Report Event T1 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed DS1 related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^T1 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf>
or
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-380 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier in the format yy-mm-dd in the format hh:mm:ss automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-349 Table 3-381 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific Values Purpose Identify the DS1 facility where slot# = 4 to 10 port# = 1 to 12 Identify the DS1 facility on DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# =3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 Identify the DS1 facility on the DSM where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Table 3-382 Reponse parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> Values T-MONTYPE INC INT TC SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT NA 1 and up Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Incoming failure Software failure Transient condition Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Not applicable Measured value of a monitored parameter
DS1-slot#-port#-t1#
DSM AID
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
<condeff>
<monval>
3-350 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-382 Reponse parameter descriptions Parameter <thlev> <tmper> 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT <conddescr> text message Table 3-383 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter montype Possible values CVL ESL SESL CVP ESP SEFSP SESP SASP UASP CSSP Description Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds - Line Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path SEF / AIS Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Controlled Slip Seconds - Path Values 1 and up Description Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period 15 minute 1 day untimed Condition description
Example message
At 9 p.m. on October 17, 2001, the DS1 in slot 4, port 2 records unavailable seconds. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 123 REPT EVT T1<cr> <lf> "DS1-4-2:T-UASP,TC,10-17:21:00:00,NEND,TRMT,15,10,15-MIN :\"T-UASP\"<cr> <lf>
At 9 p.m. on October 17, 2001, the DS1 in slot 4, port 10 reports a problem with the DS1 test pattern. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 123 REPT EVT T1<cr> <lf> "DS1-4-10:INT,SC,10-17:21:00:00,NEND,NA:\"DS1 Test Signal Active-OutofSync\"" <cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^T3
Report Event T3 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed DS3 related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^T3 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>,<monval>,<thlev>,<tmper>:<conddescr>"<cr> <lf> Table 3-384 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Table 3-385 AID descriptions AID type DS3 AID Command-specific Values DS3-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the DS3 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 12 Identify the DS3 where slot# = 3, 5 port# = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 hslot = 3 to 10 hport = 1 to 4 Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
3-352 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-386 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> <condeff> <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> monval thlev tmper 15-MIN 1-DAY 1-UNT <conddescr> text message Table 3-387 Montype parameter descriptions Parameter montype Possible values CVL ESL SESL CVP ESP SESP SASP UASP Description Coding Violations - Line Errored Seconds - Line Severely Errored Seconds - Line Coding Violations - Path Errored Seconds - Path Severely Errored Seconds - Path SEF / AIS Seconds - Path Unavailable Seconds - Path Values T-MONTYPE TC mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND FEND RCV TRMT 1 and up 1 and up Description Threshold-crossing monitored threshold type Transient condition Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Far end Receive (onto the node) Transmit (away from the node) Measured value of a monitored parameter Threshold level for the monitored parameter The accumulation time period 15 minute 1 day untimed Condition description
Example message
At 9 p.m. on October 17, 2001, the DS3x12 in slot 3, port 3 records coding violations. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 123 REPT EVT T3<cr> <lf> "DS3-3-3:T-CVL,TC,10-17,21:00:00,NEND,RCV,3,3,15-MIN :\"T-CVL\"<cr> <lf>
REPT^EVT^VT1
Report Event VT1 is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of non-alarmed VT1.5 related events. The event being reported can be a change of status or the occurrence of an irregularity, which by itself is not severe enough to warrant an alarm notification. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EVT^VT1 <cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
The message must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. Its format is in one of the two following formats:
^^^"<aid>:<condtype>,<condeff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>, <dirn>:<conddescr>" <cr> <lf> Table 3-388 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <rspblk> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message Response block. See the following tables for details.
3-354 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-389 AID descriptions AID type VT1.5 facility AID Command-specific Values EC1-slot#-port#-vtg#-vt# Purpose Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 1, 2 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 Identify the VT1.5 path where slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Identify the VT1.5 path on DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# =3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28
OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt#
OC3-slot#-1-sts#-vtg#-vt#%HLINK-OC3-hslot#-hport#
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt#
OC12-slot#-1-sts#-vtg#-vt#%HLINK-OC12-hslot#-hport#
OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt#
DS1-slot#-port#-t1#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-355 Table 3-390 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <condtype> <condeff> <ocrdat> <ocrtm> <locn> <dirn> Values INT SC CL mm-dd hh-mm-ss NEND NA Description Internal hardware fault/failure Standing condition raised Standing condition cleared Date when the event occurred Time when the event occurred Near end Not applicable
Example message
At 9 p.m. on October 17, 2001, the OC-3 in slot 3, STS-3 records an internal hardware fault/failure. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NE01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 123 REPT EVT VT1 <cr> <lf> "OC48-11-3-1-1:INT,SC,10-17,21:00:00,NEND,NA:\Auto VT1.5 Path Switch Complete"" <cr> <lf>
REPT^EX^LINK
Report exercise link is generated by the NPx to exercise connections (links) made to the NPx and to detect any half open connections. If the link is half open, the attempt to transmit this message will fail and result in the NPx closing the link and cleaning up the associated resources. Note: A TCP connection is half open when one end has closed or aborted the connection without the knowledge of the other end. This can happen at any time one of the two hosts crashes. As long as there is no attempt to transfer data across a half-open connection, the end that is still up will not detect that the other end has crashed. The report exercise link message is only sent where there is no timeout set on the TL1 session (TIMEOUTA=N) or where no TL1 session has been activated (no ACT-USER has been completed). The frequency of the REPT EX LINK is determined by the level of the user and whether there is an active TL1 session. The frequency is either every 30 seconds, or every 30 minutes.
Table 3-391 Use and frequency of the REPT EX LINK message Account UPC level Session TIMEOUTA Is REPT EX LINK sent? REPT EX LINK time interval Level 5 Y default N n/a N Y 30 sec Level 4, 3, 2, 1 Y default N n/a N Y Unknown (no ACT-USER) n/a Y
30 min 30 min
Message format
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^EX^LINK <cr> <lf> ;
Note: Since an atag of 0000000 is always used for this type of report, they are not logged into the automatic output (AO) buffer.
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-357 Table 3-392 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message. The atag for REPT EX LINK is 000.
Example message
At 2 a.m. on November 17, 2001, the following message was generated by EXPRESS45NP:
<cr> <lf> <lf> EXPRESS45NP 01-11-17 02:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 000 REPT EX LINK <cr> <lf>
REPT^IMSG
Report Instant Message is generated by a network element to report the occurrence of a new text message. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^IMSG <cr> <lf> ^^^"<date>,<time>:UID=<uid>:\"<msg>\"" <cr> <lf>;
Note: Since an atag of 0000000 is always used for this type of report, they are not logged into the automatic output (AO) buffer.
Table 3-393 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <uid> <msg> Example message Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message User identifier Message
At 1:17 p.m. on October 17, 2003, user identifier ADMIN sent the following message "I am restarting this NE. Please re-connect in 5 minutes". The following will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> NPGX0504 03-10-17 13:17:00 <cr> <lf> A 000000 REPT IMSG <cr> <lf> "03-10-17,13-17-00:UID=ADMIN:18:\"I am restarting this NE. Please re-connect in 5 minutes.\"" <cr> <lf>;
REPT^SOC
The Report Span of Control is generated by the NPx to a level 5 user if there is a change in the span of control of the NPx, such as an NE is removed from or added to the span of control, or the connection status from an NPx to an NE in the span of control is changed. Message format All parameters in this message are either positional or name-defined.
<cr> <lf> <lf> ^^^<sid>^<date>^<time> <cr> <lf> A^^<atag>^REPT^SOC <cr> <lf> ^^^"<msgtype>:<netid>,<status>,<swversion>" <cr> <lf> ;
Note: Since an atag of 0000000 is always used for this type of report, they are not logged into the automatic output (AO) buffer.
Table 3-394 Syntax definition Field <sid> <date> <time> <atag> <msgtype> <netid> <status> <swversion> Purpose The network element source identifier In the format yy-mm-dd In the format hh:mm:ss Automatic tag, the numerical identification of the message See the following table for details.
Table 3-395 Response parameter descriptions Parameter <msgtype> Values EAD ERM CSR Description NE added NE removed Connection status report Target identifier
<netid>
3-360 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-395 (continued) Response parameter descriptions Parameter <status> Values UP DOWN XPID Description Connection is up Connection is down Incorrect password Software version
<swversion>
Note: For the Connection status report notification, the software version is provided only if the connection status changes from DOWN to UP, or from XPID to UP. Example message
At 9 p.m. on October 17, 2001, the connection status from NP OC3NP01 to network element OC3NE02 was changed from down to up. This message will be returned:
<cr> <lf> <lf> OC3NP01 01-10-17 21:00:00 <cr> <lf> A 000000 REPT SOC <cr> <lf> "CSR:OC3NE02,UP,REL0902X.DU" <cr> <lf>
REPT-INITZN
The Report Initialization command is used to release all test access sessions on the network element. This command removes all test access connections and restores previous connections. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
REPT-INITZN:[TID]::CTAG; Table 3-396 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
REPT-STAT
The Report State command is used to check that the association (communication) between the network element and test equipment is alive. An acknowledgement will be sent within 60 seconds. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
REPT-STAT:[TID]::CTAG; Table 3-397 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Check link association between the test equipment and network element NewYork.
REPT-STAT:NEWYORK::MYTAG;
RLS-EXT-CONT
The Release External Control command is used to switch any of the four electrical relays, for controlling external devices, from operative mode to idle mode. The external control relays can be configured for either normally closed or normally open mode and are connected to external devices through wire-wrap pins. External control relays are normally inoperative and are switched into operative mode by the OPR-EXT-CONT command. Note: Though the CONTTYPE value is optional it should be used to prevent errors. If an incorrect value to relay pair is entered then the command will be denied by the network element. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-EXT-CONT:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[CONTTYPE]; Table 3-398 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG CONTTYPE Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. A group of values is acceptable. Correlation tag Optional parameter, the TYPE of control for which the control state is being set
3-364 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-399 AID descriptions AID TYPE Command-specific values Purpose Identify the contact number Release relays 1 to 4. ALL not allowed if CONTTYPE is null. Multiple contacts for example 1,2 DS1 service module office audible alarms number = 1 to 4, hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 All DS1 service module or MS-DSM office audible alarms HLINE=OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Table 3-400 Parameter descriptions Parameter CONTTYPE Possible values null Description Optional parameter (ALL) Not allowed when AID is ALL AIRCOND ENGINE FAN GEN HEAT LIGHT MISC SPKLR Example input air conditioning engine fan generator heat light miscellaneous sprinkler
ALL-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
Switch external control 1, for air conditioning off at network element NEWYORK:
RLS-EXT-CONT:NEWYORK:1:CTAG34::AIRCOND;
Switch off engine and fan on relays 2 and 3 respectively at network element WASHINGTON:
RLS-EXT-CONT:WASHINGTON:2&3:CTAG45::ENGINE&FAN; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
RLS-LPBK-EC1
The Release Loopback EC-1 command instructs the equipment to release an EC-1 facility loopback. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-LPBK-EC1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-401 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag
At the NEWYORK network element, release the EC-1 facility loopback in slot 4 port 7 :
RLS-LPBK-EC1:NEWYORK:DS1-4-7:CTAG23;
RLS-LPBK-ETH
The Release Loopback Ethernet command releases a loopback on an Ethernet facility (LAN port) of a 2x100BT-P2P, 8x100BT-P2P, 4x100FX-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P circuit pack. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-LPBK-ETH:TID:AID:CTAG; Table 3-402 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Ethernet facility to release from loopback mode. Correlation tag
Table 3-403 AID descriptions AID type ETH Command-specific values ETH-slot#-port# Details Identify the Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 slot- 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 Example input
ETH-slot-port-%HLINK-HlineHslot-Hport
Release the loopback on LAN port 1 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA:
RLS-LPBK-ETH:OTTAWA:ETH-7-1:CTAG23;
RLS-LPBK-FC
The Release Loopback Fibre Channel command releases a loopback on an Fibre Channel facility (LAN port) of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P or 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-LPBK-FC:TID:AID:CTAG; Table 3-404 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Fibre Channel facility to release from loopback mode. Correlation tag
Table 3-405 AID descriptions AID type FC Command-specific values Details FC-slot#-port# Identify the Fibre Channel facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2
Example input
RLS-LPBK-OC12
The Release Loopback OC12 command instructs the equipment to release an OC-12 facility loopback. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-LPBK-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-406 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-407 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# Details slot # = 3 to 12 port # = 1 for OC-12 port # = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, release the loopback on the specified OC-12 facility:
RLS-LPBK-OC12:SEATTLE:OC12-11-1:CTAG23;
RLS-LPBK-OC192
The Release Loopback OC192 command instructs the equipment to release an OC-192 facility loopback. Note 1: After the loopback has been released, a cold restart of the OC-192 circuit pack is automatically performed. Note 2: After the loopback has been released, you should clear any performance measurements that were collected while the OC-192 was in the loopback state. See INIT-REG-OC192 on page 3-149. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-LPBK-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-408 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-409 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 Command-specific values OC192-slot# Details slot # = 11 or 12
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, release the loopback on the specified OC-192 facility:
RLS-LPBK-OC192:SEATTLE:OC192-12:CTAG23;
RLS-LPBK-OC3
The Release Loopback OC3 command instructs the equipment to release an OC-3 facility loopback. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-LPBK-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-410 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-411 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values OC-3 OC3-slot# -port# Details slot # = 3 to 10 port # = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 or port# = 1 for OC-3
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, release the loopback on the specified OC-3 facility:
RLS-LPBK-OC3:SEATTLE:OC3-3-1:CTAG23RLS-LPBK-OC12
RLS-LPBK-OC48
The Release Loopback OC48 command instructs the equipment to release an OC-48 facility loopback. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-LPBK-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-412 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-413 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 Command-specific values OC48-slot# Details slot # = 11 or 12 for OC-48 slot # = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, release the loopback on the specified OC-48 facility:
RLS-LPBK-OC48:SEATTLE:OC48-12:CTAG23;
RLS-LPBK-T1
The Release Loopback T1 command instructs the equipment to release a DS1 facility loopback. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-LPBK-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-414 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-415 AID descriptions AID type DS1 DS3V Command-specific values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-port#-t1# Purpose Identify the DS1 facility where slot# =4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 Identify DS1s on DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 Identify the T1 facility on the DS1 service module or the MS-DSM where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag
DSM or MS DSM
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
Example input
At the NEWYORK network element, release the DS1 facility loopback in slot 4 port 7:
RLS-LPBK-T1:NEWYORK:DS1-4-7:CTAG23;
RLS-LPBK-T3
The Release Loopback T3 command instructs the equipment to release a DS3 facility loopback. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-LPBK-T3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-416 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-417 AID descriptions AID type DS3 Command-specific values Purpose DS3-slot#-port# Identify the DS3 where slot# = 3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3VTx12 slot = 3,5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The facility to act on. Correlation tag
DS3-slot-port-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport
Example input
At the SEATTLE network element, release the DS3 facility loopback in slot 7 port 1:
RLS-LPBK-T3:SEATTLE:DS3-7-1:CTAG45;
RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT
The Release Protection Switch Equipment command instructs the network element to release any equipment protection switch requests that were initiated by the OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT command and are active on the entity specified. This command clears lockouts, forced switches and manual switches of DS1 circuit packs, and forced switches of DS3x3, DS3x12, DS3x12e, EC1x12, DS3/EC1x12, or DS3VTx12 circuit packs. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-418 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-419 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID DS3 AID DS3V AID DS1 service module AID Command-specific values DS1-slot# DS3-slot# DS3V-slot# DS1TM-slot#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#-hport# Purpose Identify the DS1 where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3 where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3VTx12 where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DSM DS1x84 termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-375 Table 3-419 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
AGGOC3OC12-slot-%HLINK- Identify a single MS DSM termination HLINE-Hslot-Hport# module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4, HLINE=OC3 or OC12 EC1 AID EC1-slot# Identify the EC-1 where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4, HLINE=OC3 or OC12
Example input
RLS-PROTNSW-OC12
The Release Protection Switch OC-12 command instructs the network element to release an OC-12 protection switch request. This command clears lockouts and forced switches on OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS circuit packs. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-420 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-421 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the OC-12 facility slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Example input
Place the OC-12 circuit pack in slot 10 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-OC12:SEATTLE:OC12-10-1:CTAG12;
RLS-PROTNSW-OC192
The Release Protection Switch OC-192 command instructs the network element to release an OC-192 protection switch request. This command clears lockouts and forced switches on OC-192 circuit packs. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-422 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch command
Table 3-423 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# Purpose Identifies the OC-192 facility slot# = 11, 12
3-378 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-424 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values MAN FRCD LOCKOUT LOCKOUT_PROT Description Release a manual switch in a BLSR system. Release a forced switch in a 1+1 linear or BLSR system (default). Release a lockout on the protection circuit pack in a 1+1 linear system. Release the protection lockout in a BLSR system. (valid only for BLSR systems)
LOCKOUT_WRKG Release the working lockout in a BLSR system. (valid only for BLSR systems) WTR End the wait-to-restore period and release the associated automatic switch for a BLSR system. (valid only for BLSR systems)
Example input
Place the OC-192 circuit pack in slot 12 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-OC192:SEATTLE:OC192-12:CTAG12;
RLS-PROTNSW-OC3
The Release Protection Switch OC-3 command instructs the network element to release an OC-3 protection switch request. This command clears lockouts and forced switches of OC-3 or OC-3x4 circuit packs. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-425 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-426 AID descriptions AID type OC-3 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port# Purpose Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Example input
Place the OC-3x4 circuit pack in slot 10 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-OC3:SEATTLE:OC3-10:CTAG12;
RLS-PROTNSW-OC48
The Release Protection Switch OC-48 command instructs the network element to release an OC-48 protection switch request. This command clears lockouts and forced switches on OC-48 and OC-48 STS circuit packs. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG::[SC]; Table 3-427 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG SC Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag Switch command
Table 3-428 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identifies the OC-48 facility slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-381 Table 3-429 Parameter descriptions Parameter SC Possible values MAN FRCD LOCKOUT LOCKOUT_PROT Description Release a manual switch in a BLSR system. Release a forced switch in a 1+1 linear or BLSR system (default). Release a lockout on the protection circuit pack in a 1+1 linear system. Release the protection lockout in a BLSR system. (valid only for BLSR systems)
LOCKOUT_WRKG Release the working lockout in a BLSR system. (valid only for BLSR systems) WTR End the wait-to-restore period and release the associated automatic switch for a BLSR system. (valid only for BLSR systems)
Example input
Place the OC-48 circuit pack in slot 12 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-OC48:SEATTLE:OC48-12:CTAG12;
RLS-PROTNSW-STS1
The Release Protection Switch STS-1 command instructs the network element to release an STS-1 path protection switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-STS1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-430 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-431 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-1 path on the OC-3 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 to 3 Identify the STS-1 path on the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 to 12 Identify the STS-1 path on the OC-48 or OC-48 STS slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1 to 48 Identify the STS-1 path on the OC-192 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 192 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
Place the STS-1 signal on OC-3x4 circuit pack in slot 10 port 1 sts1 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-STS1:SEATTLE:OC3-10-1-1:CTAG12;
RLS-PROTNSW-STS12C
The Release Protection Switch STS-12c command instructs the network element to release an STS-12c path protection switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-STS12C:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-432 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-433 AID descriptions AID type STS-12c facility AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port#-sts# OC12-slot#-port#-ALL Purpose slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1 slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... 181 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tags
Place the STS-12c signal on OC-12 circuit pack in slot 10 sts 1 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-STS12C:SEATTLE:OC12-10-1:CTAG12;
RLS-PROTNSW-STS24C
The Release Protection Switch STS-24c command instructs the network element to release an STS-24c path protection switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-STS24C:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-434 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-435 AID descriptions AID type STS-24c facility AID Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL Example input Purpose slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 25 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, 49, ... 169 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tags
Place the STS-24c signal on OC-48 circuit pack in slot 10 sts 1 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-STS24C:SEATTLE:OC48-10-1:CTAG12;
RLS-PROTNSW-STS3C
The Release Protection Switch STS-3c command instructs the network element to release an STS-3c path protection switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-STS3C:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-436 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-437 AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the STS-3c path on the OC-3 slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 Identify the STS-3c path on the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7 or 10 Identify the STS-3c path on the OC-48 or OC-48 STS slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 46 Identify the STS-3c path on the OC-192 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ...to 190 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tags
OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL
OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL
Example input
Place the STS-3c signal on OC-3x4 circuit pack in slot 10 port 1 sts 1 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-STS3C:SEATTLE:OC3-10-1-1:CTAG12;
RLS-PROTNSW-STS48C
The Release Protection Switch STS-48c command instructs the network element to release an STS-48c path protection switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-STS48C:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-438 Syntax definitions Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-439 AID descriptions AID type STS-48c facility AID Command-specific values OC48-slot#-sts# OC48-slot#-ALL OC192-slot#-sts# OC192-slot#-ALL Example input Purpose slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS sts# = 1, 25 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1, 25, 49, ... 169 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tags
Place the STS-48c signal on OC-48 circuit pack in slot 10 sts 1 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-STS48C:SEATTLE:OC48-10-1:CTAG12;
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1
The Release Protection Switch VT1 command instructs the network element to release a VT1.5 path protection switch request. Security level Level 2 Input syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-440 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Table 3-441 AID descriptions AID type VT1.5 facility AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC3-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL Purpose Identify the VT1.5 path on the OC-3 slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 sts# = 1 to 3 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 Purpose Target identifier Access identifier Correlation tag
OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-vtg#-vt# Identify the VT1.5 path on the OC-12 OC12-slot#-port#-sts#-ALL slot# = 3 to 12 port# = 1 sts# = 1 to 12 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4 OC48-slot#-sts#-vtg#-vt# OC48-slot#-sts#-ALL Identify the VT1.5 path on the OC-48 slot# = 11, 12 sts# = 1 to 48 vtg# = 1 to 7 vt# = 1 to 4
Example input
Place the VT1.5 signal on OC-3x4 circuit pack in slot 10, port 1, STS1#1, VTG#1, VT# 2 back into normal mode:
RLS-PROTNSW-VT1:SEATTLE:OC3-10-1-1-1-2:CTAG12;
RMV-EC1
The Remove EC-1 command instructs a network element to change the state of the EC-1 facility from in service to out-of-service maintenance for memory administration. Once the EC-1 is removed from service, service-affecting tests or physical replacement of defective equipment can be initiated. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-EC1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-442 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. EC-1 to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-443 AID descriptions AID type EC-1 Command-specific values EC1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the EC-1 facility slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12
Example input
Remove the EC1 facility on the EC1 circuit pack in slot 7 port 1:
RMV-EC1:NEWYORK:EC1-7-1:CTAG56;
RMV-EQPT
The Remove Equipment command removes the specified type of common equipment module from service and puts it in an out-of-service maintenance for memory administration state (OOS-MA). Any facilities on the equipment must also be OOS for this to be permitted. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-EQPT:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-444 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Equipment to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-445 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID DS3 AID DS3VT AID DS3/EC1 AID OC-3 AID OC-12 AID Command-specific values DS1-slot# DS3-slot# DS3V-slot# DS3EC1-slot# Purpose Identify the DS1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3/EC1x12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-3 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS
OC3-slot# OC12-slot#
3-390 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-445 (continued) AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identify the OC-48 equipment where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS Identify the OC-48 DWDM SFP module where slot# = 3 to 12, port# = 1 Identify the OC-192 equipment where slot# = 11, 12 Identify the EC-1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the ILAN equipment Identify the protection switch controller Identify the protection switch extender Note: The PSX can only be deleted if DS1-6-5 and higher do not exist. NP AID IPT100 AID GE AID 1GE AID NP IPT100-slot# GE-slot#-port# 1GE-slot# Identify the network processor Identify the 4x100BT equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE 2.5G SFP module where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port#=1, 2 Identify the 2xGigE equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for double slot cards and slot#=3 to 10 for single slot 2xGigE. Identify the 4x100FX equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 4x100FX-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10
OC-48 DWDM SFP AID OC-192 AID EC1 AID ILAN AID PSC AID PSX AID
POC48-slot#-port#
100FOSO AID
100FOSO-slot#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-391 Table 3-445 (continued) AID descriptions AID type 100FOST AID Command-specific values 100FOST-slot# Purpose Identify the 8x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10
Identify the 2xGigE 2.5G equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 Identify the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P SFP module, where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1, 2 Identify the DSM DS1 termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
DS1TM AID
DS1TM-slot#%HLINK-OC3-hslot#hport#
3-392 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-445 (continued) AID descriptions AID type Command-specific values Purpose Identify the MS DSM Aggregate equipment, where HLINE= OC3 slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM Aggregate equipment, where HLINE= OC3 or OC12 slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM DS3 Expansion equipment, where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 3 to 6, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM 10/100BaseT Expansion equipment, where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 3 to 6, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM OC-3 SFP, where HLINE=OC3 slot# = 1 or 2, port#=1, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM OC-3/12 SFP, where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 1 or 2, port# = 1, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the VTX48, VTX40/10, or STX-192 equipment, where slot# = 13 or 14
AGGOC3OC12- slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
PECN-slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
PFOST-slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
Example input
RMV-ETH
The Remove Ethernet command changes an Ethernet facility (ETH port) of a 2x100BT-P2P, 8x100BT-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P , 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P or 4x100FX P2P circuit pack from an in-service (IS) state to an out-of-service management (OOS-MA) state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-ETH:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-446 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Ethernet facility to change. Correlation tag
Table 3-447 AID descriptions AID type ETH AID Command-specific values Purpose ETH-slot#-port# ETH-slot#-ALL ETH-slot-port-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport Identify the Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2 slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 Example input
Change ETH port 1 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA to an OOS-MA state:
RMV-ETH:OTTAWA:ETH-7-1:CTAG77;
RMV-FC
The Remove Fibre Channel command changes a Fibre Channel facility (FC port) of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P or a 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack from an in-service (IS) state to an out-of-service management (OOS-MA) state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-FC:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-448 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Fibre Channel facility to change. Correlation tag
Table 3-449 AID descriptions AID type FC Command-specific values Purpose FC-slot#-port# FC-slot#-ALL Identify the Fibre Channel facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2
Example input
Change FC port 1 of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA to an OOS-MA state:
RMV-FC:OTTAWA:FC-7-1:CTAG77;
RMV-OC12
The Remove OC-12 command instructs a network element to change the state of the OC-12 facility from in service to out-of-service maintenance for memory administration. Once the OC-12 facility is removed from service, service-affecting tests or physical replacement of defective equipment can be initiated. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-450 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-12 to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-451 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# OC-12-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-12 facility where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
MS-DSM AID
OC12-slot-1-%HLINK-OC12Hslot-Hport
Example input
Remove the OC-12 facility on the OC-12 circuit pack in slot 7 port 1:
RMV-OC12:NEWYORK:OC12-7:CTAG56;
RMV-OC192
The Remove OC-192 command instructs a network element to change the state of the OC-192 facility from in service to out-of-service maintenance for memory administration. After the OC-192 facility is removed from service, service-affecting tests or replacement of defective equipment can be initiated. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-452 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-192 to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-453 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# Purpose Identifies the OC-192 facility slot# = 11, 12
Example input
Remove the OC-192 facility on the OC-192 circuit pack in slot 11:
RMV-OC192:NEWYORK:OC192-11:CTAG56;
RMV-OC3
The Remove OC-3 command instructs a network element to change the state of the OC-3 facility from in service to out-of-service maintenance for memory administration. Once the OC-3 is removed from service, service-affecting tests or physical replacement of defective equipment can be initiated. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-454 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-3 to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-455 AID descriptions AID type OC-3 AID Command-specific values OC3-slot#-port# OC3-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 slot# = 1 or 2 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
Remove the OC-3 facility on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in slot 10 port 1:
RMV-OC3:NEWYORK:OC3-10-1:CTAG56;
RMV-OC48
The Remove OC-48 command instructs a network element to change the state of the OC-48 facility from in service to out-of-service maintenance for memory administration. After the OC-48 facility is removed from service, service-affecting tests or replacement of defective equipment can be initiated. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-456 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-48 to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-457 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identifies the OC-48 facility slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
Example input
Remove the OC-48 facility on the OC-48 circuit pack in slot 11:
RMV-OC48:NEWYORK:OC48-11:CTAG56;
RMV-SOC
The Remove Span of Control command is used to remove a network element from the NP span of control. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
RMV-SOC:[TID]:SID:CTAG; Table 3-458 Syntax definition Field TID SID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier System identifier. 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters or a text string enclosed within quotations. Correlation tag
RMV-T1
The Remove T1 command instructs a network element to change the state of the DS1 from in-service to out-of-service maintenance for memory administration. Once the DS1 is removed from service, service-affecting tests or physical replacement of defective equipment can be initiated. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-459 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS1s to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-460 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID DS3 AID Command-specific values Purpose DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-ALL DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL Identify the DS1s where slot# =4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 Identify the DS1s where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DS1 service module port# = 1 to 84 HLINE = OC3 or OC12 hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
DSM AID
DS1-1-port#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#-hport#
DS1-1-ALL-%HLINK-HLINE All DS1 ports on the DS1 service module -hslot#-hport# hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 Example input
Remove the DS1 facility on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 4 port 1:
RMV-T1:NEWYORK:DS1-4-1:CTAG45;
Remove all the DS1 facilities on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 6:
RMV-T1:CHARLESTON:DS1-6-ALL:CTAG78;
RMV-T3
The Remove T3 command instructs a network element to change the state of the DS3 from in-service to out-of-service maintenance for memory administration. Once the DS3 is removed from service, service-affecting tests or physical replacement of defective equipment can be initiated. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RMV-T3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-461 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS3s to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-462 AID descriptions AID type T3 Command-specific Purpose values DS3-slot#-port# DS3-slot#-ALL Identify the DS3s slot# =3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3VTx12 slot = 3, 5, port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4
DS3-slot-port%HLINK-HlineHslot-Hport
Example input
Remove the DS3 facility on the DS3 circuit pack in slot 5 port 1:
RMV-T3:TOMBSTONE:DS3-5-1:CTAG45;
RST-BANNER
The Reset Banner command is used to replace the current login banner warning text with the login banner text saved to a backup file on a network element or NP. The login banner warning text is displayed when you log in to a TL1 session on a network element or NP. If there is no login banner warning text saved to a backup file and you execute this command, the login banner warning text does not change. Security level Level 4 Input syntax
RST-BANNER:[TID]::CTAG; Table 3-463 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG Example input Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag
Replace the login banner warning text for network element OTTAWA with the login banner text saved to a backup file on this network element:
RST-BANNER:OTTAWA::CTAG93;
RST-EC1
The Restore EC-1 command instructs the network element to bring an EC-1 facility back into service from an out-of-service maintenance for memory administration state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-EC1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-464 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. EC-1 facility to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-465 AID descriptions AID type EC-1 AID Command-specific values EC1-slot#-port# EC1-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the EC-1 facility slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port # = 1 to 3 for EC-1x3 port # = 1 to 12 for EC-1x12
Example input
Restore the EC-1 facility on the EC-1 circuit pack in slot 5 port 1:
RST-EC1:NEWYORK:EC1-5-1:CTAG77;
RST-EQPT
The Restore Equipment command brings a given type of common equipment module back into service from an out-of-service maintenance for memory administration state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-EQPT:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-466 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. Equipment to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-467 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID DS3 AID DS3VT AID DS3/EC1 AID OC-3 AID OC-12 AID Command-specific Purpose values DS1-slot# DS3-slot# DS3V-slot# DS3EC1-slot# OC3-slot# OC12-slot# Identify the DS1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3VTx12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the DS3/EC1x12 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-3 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the OC-12 or OC-12x4 STS equipment where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS Identify the OC-48 equipment where slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
OC-48 AID
OC48-slot#
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-405 Table 3-467 (continued) AID descriptions AID type OC-48 DWDM SFP AID OC-192 AID EC1 AID ILAN AID PSC AID PSX AID Command-specific Purpose values POC48-slot#-port# Identify the OC-48 DWDM SFP module where slot# = 3 to 12, port# = 1 Identify the OC-192 equipment where slot# = 11, 12 Identify the EC-1 equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the ILAN equipment Identify the protection switch controller Identify the protection switch extender Note: The PSX can only be deleted if DS1-6-5 and higher do not exist. NP AID IPT100 AID GE AID 1GE AID NP IPT100-slot# GE-slot#-port# 1GE-slot# Identify the network processor Identify the 4x100BT equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE 2.5G SFP module where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port#=1, 2 Identify the 2xGigE equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 for double slot cards and slot#=3 to 10 for single slot 2xGigE. Identify the 4x100FX equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 4x100FX-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 8x100BT-P2P equipment where slot# = 3 to 10 Identify the 2xGigE 2.5G equipment where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9
100FX AID
100FX-slot#
3-406 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-467 (continued) AID descriptions AID type GEFC AID Command-specific Purpose values GEFC-slot#-port# Identify the 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C or 2xGigE-P2P SFP module, where slot# = 3 to 10, port# = 1, 2
DS1TM AID
DS1TM-slot#Identify the DSM DS1 termination module, %HLINK-OC3-hslot# where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, -hport# hport# = 1 to 4 AGGOC3-slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# Identify MS DSM Aggregate equipment where HLINE= OC3, slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
MS DSM AID
Identify MS DSM Aggregate equipment AGGOC3OC12where slot#-%HLINKHLINE-hslot#-hport# HLINE= OC3 or OC12 slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 PECN-slot#%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport# Identify MS DSM DS3 Expansion equipment, where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 3 to 6, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM 10/100BaseT Expansion equipment, where HLINE=OC3 or OC12, slot# = 3 to 6, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM OC-3 SFP, where HLINE=OC3, slot# = 1 or 2, port#=1, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the MS DSM OC-3/12 SFP, where HLINE=OC3 or OC12 slot# = 1 or 2, port# = 1, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4 Identify the VTX48, VTX40/10, or STX-192 equipment , where slot# = 13 or 14
Example input
Put the DS1 circuit pack in slot 4 back in to service for network element NEWYORK:
RST-EQPT:NEWYORK:DS1-4:CTAG34;
RST-ETH
The Restore Ethernet command changes an Ethernet facility (ETH port) of a 2x100BT-P2P, 8x100BT-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P, 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C, 2xGigE-P2P or 4x100FX P2P circuit pack from an out-of-service management (OOS-MA) state to an in-service (IS) state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-ETH:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-468 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Ethernet facility to change. Correlation tag
Table 3-469 AID descriptions AID type ETH AID Command-specific values Purpose ETH-slot#-port# ETH-slot#-ALL Identify the Ethernet facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 to 4 for 4x100FX-P2P port# = 1 to 8 for 8x100BT-P2P port# = 1 or 2 MS DSM Ethernet Facility ETH-slot-port-%HLINKHline-Hslot-Hport slot = 3 to 6; port = 1 to 8 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4 Example input
Change ETH port 1 of the 2x100BT-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA to an IS state:
RST-ETH:OTTAWA:ETH-7-1:CTAG77;
RST-FC
The Restore Fibre Channel command changes a Fibre Channel facility (FC port) of a 2xGigE/FC-P2P or a 2xGigE/FC-P2P-C circuit pack from an out-of-service management (OOS-MA) state to an in-service (IS) state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-FC:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-470 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. The Fibre Channel facility to change. Correlation tag
Table 3-471 AID descriptions AID type FC AID Command-specific values Purpose FC-slot#-port# FC-slot#-ALL Identify the Fibre Channel facility where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 or 2
Example input
Change FC port 1 of the 2xGigE/FC-P2P circuit pack in slot 7 of network element OTTAWA to an IS state:
RST-FC:OTTAWA:FC-7-1:CTAG77;
RST-OC12
The Restore OC-12 command instructs the network element to bring an OC-12 facility back into service from an out-of-service maintenance for memory administration state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-OC12:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-472 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-12 to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-473 AID descriptions AID type OC-12 AID Command-specific values OC12-slot#-port# OC12-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-12s where slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-12 slot# = 3 to 10 for OC-12x4 STS port# = 1 for OC-12 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-12x4 STS Identify a single MS DSM termination module, where slot# = 1 or 2, hslot# = 3 to 10, hport# = 1 to 4
MS DSM AID
OC12-slot-1-%HLINK-OC12Hslot-Hport
Example input
Restore the OC-12 facility on the OC-12 circuit pack in slot 11 port 1:
RST-OC12:NEWYORK:OC12-11-1:CTAG77;
RST-OC192
The Restore OC-192 command instructs the network element to bring an OC-192 facility back into service from an out-of-service maintenance for memory administration state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-OC192:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-474 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-192 to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-475 AID descriptions AID type OC-192 AID Command-specific values OC192-slot# Purpose Identifies the OC-192 facility slot# = 11, 12
Example input
Restore the OC-192 facility on the OC-192 circuit pack in slot 11:
RST-OC192:NEWYORK:OC192-11:CTAG77;
RST-OC3
The Restore OC-3 command instructs the network element to bring an OC-3 facility back into service from an out-of-service maintenance for memory administration state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-OC3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-476 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-3s to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-477 AID descriptions AID type OC-3 AID Command-specific values OC-3-slot#-port# OC-3-slot#-ALL Purpose Identify the OC-3 where slot# = 3 to 10 port# = 1 for OC-3 port# = 1 to 4 for OC-3x4 slot# = 1 or 2 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
Restore the OC-3 facility on the OC-3x4 circuit pack in slot 9 port 1:
RST-OC3:NEWYORK:OC3-9-1:CTAG77;
RST-OC48
The Restore OC-48 command instructs the network element to bring an OC-48 facility back into service from an out-of-service maintenance for memory administration state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-OC48:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-478 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. OC-48 to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-479 AID descriptions AID type OC-48 AID Command-specific values OC48-slot# Purpose Identifies the OC-48 facility slot# = 11, 12 for OC-48 slot# = 3 to 12 for OC-48 STS
Example input
Restore the OC-48 facility on the OC-48 circuit pack in slot 11:
RST-OC48:NEWYORK:OC48-11:CTAG77;
RST-PROV
The Restore Provisioning command is used to restore provisioning data (including that backed-up from circuit packs) to a shelf processor from a locally attached PC. This function can only be executed by a user through Site Manager. provisioning data (including that backed-up from circuit packs) to a shelf processor from a network processor provisioning data (including that backed-up from a shelf processor) to a network processor from a UNIX workstation or an Operations Controller (OPC) The RST-PROV command does some basic checks on the integrity of the restored data compares the software release listed in the backup data with the current software release running on the network element (NE). If they are not the same, the restoration fails. if CHKTID=Y or CHKTID is omitted, the RST-PROV command compares the TID of the network element to which provisioning data is being restored with the stored TID. If they are not the same, the restoration fails. The RST-PROV command is supported on the network element and network processor. Note: The RST-PROV command is not allowed if there is an alarm present on the network processor or shelf processor circuit pack receiving the command when it is in one of the following states: upgrade in progress; load mismatch; IS rollover in progress; duplicate SID; database save and restore in progress. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-PROV:[TID]::CTAG::[USERID],[PASSWD]:DESTTYPE=Domain [,DESTADDR=Domain][,DIR=Domain][,CHKTID=Domain] [,CHKALM=Domain];
3-414 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-480 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG USERID PASSWD DESTTYPE DESTADDR Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag User login name User login password Source of the Restore TID, IP, or locally attached PC Address of the DESTTYPE (TID or IP) which is the source of the Restore For a DESTTYPE of PC, omit DESTADDR DIR CHKTID Directory in which the backed-up provisioning data is stored. Check TID Specifies whether the operation does or does not compare the TID from which the backup was saved with the TID of the shelf processor or network processor to which the backup is being restored. CHKALM Check alarm status
Table 3-481 Parameter descriptions Parameter UID Possible values Description 1 to 10 alphanumeric characters 8 to 10 alphanumeric characters A unique, non-confidential identifier used to identify each authorized system user. A confidential code name used to activate a user login session. A remote Restore will be executed using ALFTAM or FTAM protocol to transfer files from the TID given in the DESTADDR parameter to a shelf processor or network processor. A remote Restore will be enacted using FTP to transfer files from the IP address given in the DESTADDR parameter to the network processor. A local restore will be executed between a shelf processor and a locally attached PC.
PASSWD
DESTTYPE TID
IP
PC
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-415 Table 3-481 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter Possible values Description Name of the Restore source (a network element or network processor) consisting of an identifier of 7 to 20 alphanumeric characters. The first character is alphabetic. The address of the Restore source (a network element or network processor) consisting of an identifier in the format x.x.x.x (where x=a number 0-255). A string of characters that specifies the unique directory name in which the backup is stored. If a directory name parameter is not specified in the command, when restoring provisioning data from a network processor to a shelf processor that is in its span of control, the shelf processor uses its TID to derive a default directory name. Note: The shelf processors only derive a default directory name if they are in the span of control of the destination network processor. When restoring network processor provisioning data from an external repository, the name of the directory in which the data is stored must be specified in the command or the command fails. (That is, there is no default directory name.) The directory name is a string of 1 to 60 characters. CHKTID Y (default) N CHKALM Y (default) Perform TID check Do not check the TID (Note) The RST-PROV is not allowed if there is an alarm present on the network processor or shelf processor circuit pack. The RST-PROV is allowed if there is an alarm present on the network processor or shelf processor card receiving the command except if it is in one of the following states: upgrade in progress; load mismatch; IS rollover in progress; duplicate SID; database save and restore in progress.
DIR
Directory name
Note: To restore the provisioning data of a shelf processor to a shelf processor with a different TID or the provisioning data of a network processor to a network processor with a different TID, set CHKTID to N.
Restore provisioning data stored on network processor MONTREAL to its original shelf processor in OTTAWA:
RST-PROV:OTTAWA::CTAG96:::DESTTYPE=TID,DESTADDR=MONTREAL, DIR=/saverest/NE01,CHKTID=N;
Restore provisioning data stored on a UNIX workstation to its original network processor MONTREAL:
RST-PROV:MONTREAL::CTAG96::abc123,Sam4test:DESTTYPE=IP, DESTADDR=47.100.3.54,DIR=/home/sam/saverest,CHKTID=N;
Restore provisioning data stored on directory /xyz/ from the OPC TORONTO to its original network processor OTTAWA:
RST-PROV:OTTAWA::CTAG96::userid,Passwd01:DESTTYPE=TID, DESTADDR=TORONTO,DIR=/xyz,CHKTID=N;
Restore provisioning data stored on directory /xyz/ from the OC-192 OPC of network element BOSTON to its original network processor NEWYORK:
RST-PROV:NEWYORK::CTAG96::userid,Passwd01:DESTTYPE=IP, DESTADDR=47.100.3.54,DIR=/xyz,CHKTID=N;
RST-PROV-SP
The Restore Provisioning SP command is used to restore provisioning data from a remote location with a TID or IP address to a designated SP within an NP span of control. The RST-PROV-SP command does some basic checks on the integrity of the restored data compares the software release listed in the backup data with the current software release running on the network element (NE). If they are not the same, the restoration fails. If CHKTID=Y or CHKTID is omitted, the RST-PROV-SP command compares the TID of the network element to which provisioning data is being restored with the stored TID. If they are not the same, the restoration fails. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-PROV:[TID]::CTAG::[USERID],[PASSWD]:TRGTID=Domain, DESTTYPE=Domain,DESTADDR=Domain[,DIR=Domain][,CHKTID=Domain] [,CHKALM=Domain]; Table 3-482 Syntax definition Field TID CTAG USERID PASSWD TRGTID DESTTYPE DESTADDR Purpose Target identifier Correlation tag User login name User login password Targeted TID (the SP for which the NP is required to acted upon) Source of the Restore TID or IP Address of the DESTTYPE (TID or IP) which is the source of the Restore
3-418 Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz Table 3-482 (continued) Syntax definition Field DIR CHKTID Purpose Directory in which the backed-up provisioning data is stored. Check TID Specifies whether the operation does or does not compare the TID from which the backup was saved with the TID of the shelf processor to which the backup is being restored. CHKALM Check alarm status
Table 3-483 Parameter descriptions Parameter USER ID Possible values Description 1 to 10 alphanumeric characters 8 to 10 alphanumeric characters A unique, non-confidential identifier used to identify each authorized system user. A confidential code name used to activate a user login session. A remote Restore will be executed using ALFTAM or FTAM protocol to transfer files from the TID given in the DESTADDR parameter to a shelf processor or network processor. A remote Restore will be enacted using FTP to transfer files from the IP address given in the DESTADDR parameter to the network processor. Name of the Restore source (a remote location) consisting of an identifier of 7 to 20 alphanumeric characters. The first character is alphabetic. The address of the Restore source (a remote location) consisting of an identifier in the format x.x.x.x (where x=a number 0-255). A string of characters that specifies the unique directory name in which the backup is stored. When restoring shelf processor provisioning data from a remote location, the name of the directory in which the data is stored must be specified in the command or the command fails. (That is, there is no default directory name.) The directory name is a string of 1 to 60 characters.
PASSWD
DESTTYPE TID
IP
IP address
DIR
Directory name
Commands ENT-aa to RST-zz 3-419 Table 3-483 (continued) Parameter descriptions Parameter CHKTID Possible values Description Y (default) N Perform TID check Do not check the TID To restore the provisioning data of a shelf processor to a shelf processor with a different TID, set CHKTID to N. CHKALM Y (default) N The RST-PROV-SP is not allowed if there is an alarm present on the shelf processor circuit pack. The RST-PROV-SP is allowed if there is an alarm present on the shelf processor circuit pack receiving the command except if it is in one of the following states: upgrade in progress; load mismatch; IS rollover in progress; duplicate SID; database save and restore in progress.
Example input
Restore provisioning data stored on a remote location to its original shelf processor MONTREAL:
RST-PROV-SP:MONTREAL::CTAG96::abc123,Sam4test: TRGTID=MONTREALNP,DESTTYPE=IP, DESTADDR=47.100.3.54,DIR=/home/sam/saverest,CHKTID=N, CHKALM=Y;
RST-T1
The Restore T1 command instructs a network element to bring a DS1 line facility back into service from an out-of-service maintenance for memory administration state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-T1:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-484 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS1s to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-485 AID descriptions AID type DS1 AID Command-specific values DS1-slot#-port# DS1-slot#-ALL DS1-slot#-port#-t1# DS1-slot#-port#-ALL Purpose Identify the DS1s where slot# =4 to 10, port# =1 to 12 Identify the DS1s where slot# = 3, 5, 7, 9 port# = 1 to 12 t1# = 1 to 28 DS1 service module port# = 1 to 84 hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4 All DS1 ports on the DS1 service module hslot# = 3 to 10 hport# = 1 to 4
DS3 AID
DSM AID
DS1-1-port#-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
DS1-1-ALL-%HLINK-HLINEhslot#-hport#
Example input
Restore all the DS1 facilities on the DS1 circuit pack in slot 6:
RST-T1:SEATTLE:DS1-6-ALL:CK002; Optical Metro 3500 323-1059-190 Standard Rel 16.0 Iss 1 Dec 2008
RST-T3
The Restore T3 command instructs a network element to bring a DS3 line facility back into service from an out-of-service maintenance for memory administration state. Security level Level 3 Input syntax
RST-T3:[TID]:AID:CTAG; Table 3-486 Syntax definition Field TID AID CTAG Purpose Target identifier Access identifier. DS3s to act on. Correlation tag
Table 3-487 AID descriptions AID type T3 Command-specific Purpose values DS3-slot#-port# DS3-slot#-ALL Identify the DS3s slot# =3, 5, 7, or 9 port# = 1 to 3 for DS3x3 port# = 1 to 12 for DS3x12, DS3x12e, or DS3VTx12 slot = 3 or 5; port = 1 to 6 Hline = OC3 or OC12 Hslot = 3 to10 Hport = 1 to 4
Restore the DS3 facility on the DS3 circuit pack in slot 5 port 1:
RST-T3:NEWYORK:DS3-5-1:CTAG01;
Nortel
Copyright 2000-2008 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved This document is protected by copyright laws and international treaties. All information, copyrights and any other intellectual property rights contained in this document are the property of Nortel Networks. Except as expressly authorized in writing by Nortel Networks, the holder is granted no rights to use the information contained herein and this document shall not be published, copied, produced or reproduced, modified, translated, compiled, distributed, displayed or transmitted, in whole or part, in any form or media.
This information is provided as is, and Nortel Networks does not make or provide any warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement of third party intellectual property rights, and fitness for a particular purpose. Nortel, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.